You are on page 1of 230

HFC3000E-HW-2

Handheld Nutrunner
HFC3000 Instruction Manual

January 2019
www.fec-usa.com

Copyright © 2017 FEC AUTOMATION SYSTEMS. All Rights Reserved.


Introduction

Thank you for purchasing our Handheld Nutrunner.


This instruction manual describes the procedures for installation, and handling, and actions to
be taken in case of any failure.

◆ This instruction manual shall be delivered to the end user who operates the equipment.
◆ Read all instructions before use, and always keep this instruction manual with the equipment.
◆ Items not described in this instruction manual shall be considered “unavailable.”
◆ The product specification and appearance described in this instruction manual are subject to change without notice.
◆ All rights reserved. Any disclosure, copying, distribution, or use of the information contained herein is strictly
prohibited.

For the safety of operator and equipment

◆ It is important for you to read all “Safety Precautions” before using the equipment, and understand and observe
all instructions and recommendations included in this manual.
◆ Read all instructions and recommendations included in this manual, understand the functions and performance
of this nutrunner, and use this machine correctly.
◆ Wirings and parameter settings shall be conducted by a professional engineer.
◆ Indicate the following on all instruction manuals that use this equipment.
・This equipment is capable of high voltages hazardous to human life.
◆ Never conduct a withstand voltage test or megger test on this equipment.

Points to check when unpacking

Please confirm the following when unpacking this equipment.


◆ Confirm that you received the correct model that you had ordered.
◆ Confirm that there are no missing parts, accessories or tools. (Refer to the system structure
specification list.)
◆ Check for any damage caused during transportation.
Introduction

Warranty
Warranty Period
The warranty period of this equipment is 1 year from the date of purchase or the date
of delivery to the designated place.

Scope of Warranty
If a malfunction occurs in the equipment in the state of correct use in accordance with
this instruction manual within the warranty period, repair or replacement shall be
performed free of charge. However, accommodations shall be charged accordingly
in the following cases, even within the warranty period.
1. If the cause of a malfunction is a condition, environment, handling, etc., falling
outside that which is indicated in the instruction manual.
2. If a malfunction is due to a modification or repair performed by the customer.
3. If the cause of a malfunction is an apparatus other than this equipment.
4. If a malfunction is due to use outside the specification ranges of this equipment.
5. If the cause of a malfunction is an act of God or other disaster.

The scope of this warranty is limited to the main body of our equipment and damage
induced by a malfunction of this equipment shall be excluded from the warranty.

See FEC Website for full Warranty information: https://www.fec-usa.com/rma_repair.htm


Safety Precautions
Read all instructions before operating the equipment in order to use this equipment safely and correctly.
Prior to use, read this instruction manual carefully and fully understand the equipment functions, safety
precautions and instructions.
Safety precautions in this manual are ranked as [Warning] or [Caution].

To prevent danger to the user and other persons as well as property damage, the instructions that must
be fully observed are marked with the symbols below.

◆ This instruction manual uses the following two symbols according to the degree of damage that may
be caused when the instruction is not observed.

This symbol indicates that failure to observe instruction marked with


Warning
this symbol may result in severe personal injury or death.

This symbol indicates that failure to observe instruction marked with


Caution
this symbol may result in minor personal injury or material damage.

Caution
Even instructions that are marked with may result in severe damage if they are not observed
according to conditions. Contents marked with the above symbols are very important instructions. For
your safety, follow all instructions marked with the symbols.
◆ This instruction manual uses various symbols for instructions that shall be observed.

Warning: Warning:
Electrical shock Fire

Caution: Caution: High


Caution: Fire Electrical shock Temperature

Prohibited Do not
disassemble

Required Ground
Safety Precautions

Warning

Do not remove the motors and gear cases of tools.


The tool output spindle may rotate and cause injury.

Do not repair, disassemble, or modify the equipment.


Failure to observe this instruction may cause injury, electric shock, fire, or malfunction.

Never operate the equipment where it is exposed to water or near corrosive atmosphere and
flammable gases. Failure to observe this instruction may cause fire.

Do not touch the connectors while the equipment is turned ON and for a while after the
equipment is turned OFF. Failure to observe this instruction may cause an electric shock.

Wiring operation and maintenance work shall be conducted by a professional engineer.


Failure to observe this instruction may cause an electric shock or injury.

Turn OFF the power when conducting wiring operation and maintenance and inspection.
Failure to observe this instruction may cause electric shock and injury.

Never damage the cables, apply excessive strength to cables, or squeeze the cables.
Never use damaged power cables.
Failure to observe this instruction may cause an electric shock or fire.

It takes 15 minutes for capacitor discharging. Do not touch the Controller and terminals
immediatey after power off.

Be sure to conduct type-3 grounding for the FG terminals.


Failure to observe this instruction may cause electric shock.

In case of abnormal odor, noise, or operation error occurs, stop operation immediately
and turn OFF the power source.
Failure to observe this instruction may cause injury or fire.
Safety Precautions
Transportation/Storage

Caution

Transport the equipment properly according to its weight.


Failure to observe this instruction may cause injury and malfunction.

The conditions when transporting the equipment by ship are as below.


◆ Ambient temperature: -5°C ~ +55°C (Avoid freezing)
◆ Ambient humidity: 50% RH or lower (Avoid moisture)
◆ Package: Tight seal

Do not hold cables and output spindles when transporting the tools.
Failure to observe this instruction may cause injury or malfunction.

The equipment shall be stored under the following conditions.


◆ Ambient temperature: -5°C ~ +55°C (Avoid freezing)
◆ Ambient humidity: 90% RH or lower (Avoid moisture)
◆ Atmosphere: Indoors (Avoid direct sunlight)
No corrosive gases or flammable gases
No oil mist, dust, water, salt, iron powder
◆ Avoid direct vibration or shocks.
Failure to meet the above conditions may cause earth leakage and malfunction.
Safety Precautions
Installation/Wiring

Caution

Install the controller using the specified screws.


Failure to observe this instruction may cause malfunction.

Use the specified combination of the tool and the controller.


Failure to observe this instruction may cause fire and malfunction.

The power input parts must be provided with safety measures such as breakers and
circuit protectors.
Failure to observe this instruction may cause fire and malfunction.

Do not use a tool or a controller that has damages or missing parts.


Failure to observe this instruction may cause fire, injury, and malfunction.

Do not get on the top of equipment or place a heavy object on the top of equipment.
Failure to observe this instruction may cause injury, and malfunction.

Do not subject the equipment to excessive shock or impact.


Failure to observe this instruction may cause malfunction.

Provide proper and firm wiring.


Failure to observe this instruction may cause injury, fault, and malfunction.

Operate the equipment with the specified power supply voltage.


Failure to observe this instruction may cause injury, electric shock, fire, and malfunction.

When operating the equipment at a location such as the following, take sufficient measures to
shield the equipment.
◆Location where noise is generated
◆Location where the equipment is subjected to a strong electric field or magnetic field
◆Location a power wire is not laid nearby.
Failure to observe this instruction may cause injury, fault, and malfunction.
Safety Precautions
Operation/Adjustment

Caution

Never operate the equipment with wet hands.


Failure to observe this instruction may cause electric shock.

Use the equipment under the following conditions.


◆Ambient temperature: 0°C~+45°C (Avoid freezing)
◆Ambient humidity: 90% RH or lower (Avoid moisture)
◆Atmosphere: Indoors (Avoid direct sunlight)
No corrosive gases or flammable gases
No oil mist, dust, water, salt, iron powder
◆Avoid direct vibration or shocks.
Failure to meet these conditions may cause earth leakage and malfunction.

Confirm and adjust all parameters before operation in order to prevent unexpected movement
of the equipment.
Failure to observe this instruction may cause an injury, malfunction, or fault.

Never conduct extreme adjustments or setting change that may cause instability of operation.
Failure to observe this instruction may cause an injury, malfunction, or fault.

Do not turn ON and OFF the equipment repeatedly. Failure to observe this instruction may
cause a malfunction.

Do not use the equipment at a torque higher than the maximum torque.
Failure to observe this instruction may shorten equipment life or cause breakage due to high
temperature caused by overload.

In case any abnormality occurs, remove the cause and ensure safety before resetting and
restarting the equipment.
Failure to observe this instruction may cause injury.

It is occurred reaction in sudden rise torque in the following cases.


Please attach the reaction jig.
Retightening bolt(nut) which already tighten.
Loosing bolt(nut) which already tighten.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Outline
1-1 How to Use This Instruction Manual 1-2
1-2 Features 1-3
1-3 Safety Precautions 1-5

Chapter 2 Specifications
2-1 System Specifications 2-2
2-1-1 Duty Cycle Calculation 2-2
2-1-2 Controller Specifications 2-2
2-2 Performance 2-3
2-2-1 Fastening Performance 2-3
2-2-2 Controller 2-3
2-2-3 List of Tools 2-3
2-3 Functions 2-6
2-3-1 Main Functions 2-6
2-3-2 Fastening Methods 2-7

Chapter 3 System Descriptions


3-1 Controller 3-2
3-1-1 Controller Front Panel 3-2
3-1-2 Controller Rear Panel 3-3
3-1-3 Bottom Panel DIP Switch 1 Settings 3-4
3-1-4 Bottom Panel DIP Switch 2 Settings 3-5
3-2 Tools 3-6
3-2-1 Angle Tool 3-6
3-2-2 Pistol Tool 3-7

Chapter 4 Installation & Wiring


4-1 Installation Procedure 4-2
4-2 Controller Installation Dimensions 4-3
4-3 Input Power Source Connection 4-5
4-4 Tool Cable Specifications 4-6
4-5 External Control Signal Connection 4-7
4-5-1 Controller I/O Signals [BANK SELECT=OFF] 4-8
4-5-2 Controller I/O Signals [BANK SELECT=ON] 4-9
4-5-3 Input and Output Circuit Specifications and Recommended Connection Circuit 4-10
4-5-4 Description of I/O Signals 4-11
4-5-5 Timing Chart 4-18
4-6 External Monitoring Device Signal 4-20
4-6-1 How to Calibrate External Monitoring Device 4-21
4-7 RS-232C Interface Signal 4-22
4-7-1 RS232C Specification (RS232C-1) 4-22
4-7-2 Data Format (RS232C-1) 4-23
Table of Contents
4-8 Ethernet Interface 4-25
4-8-1 TCP/IP Setup Procedure 4-26
4-8-2 TCP/IP Setup Procedure (HFC3000 User Console Software) 4-29

Chapter 5: Power Up and Operational Tests


5-1 Items to be Checked Before Power On 5-2
5-2 Items to be Checked When Powering On the Equipment 5-3
5-3 Input Initial Setting Data 5-4

Chapter 6 Fastening Operation


6-1 Changing between RUN and PROGRAM Modes 6-2
6-2 RUN Mode 6-5
6-2-1 Changing Display Modes (in the RUN Mode) 6-6
6-2-2 Real Time Display Mode 6-7
6-2-3 Fastening Result Display Mode 6-10
6-2-4 Parameter Setting Mode 6-12
6-2-5 System Parameter Display Mode 6-13
6-2-6 Status Display Mode 6-14
6-3 Parameter Program Mode 6-16
6-3-1 Changing Modes in the PROGRAM Mode 6-16
6-3-2 Parameter Selection Mode 6-17
6-3-3 Parameter Editing Mode 6-19
6-4 Parameter Copy/Erasing the Fastening Result History/Formatting of the CF Card 6-21
6-5 Fastening Reject (NG) Result Indications 6-23
6-5-1 Example of Fastening Reject item Display 6-24
6-5-2 Reject Judgment / Limits 6-26
6-5-3 Fastening Speed and Time 6-34
6-5-4 Auxiliary Attachments – Tubenut Head Setup 6-36
6-6 Parameter Structure 6-39
6-6-1 System Parameters 6-40
6-6-2 Fastening Parameters (Torque, Angle, Rate, Time, Speed, Rev/Current, other) 6-55
6-6-3 Pulse Operation 6-75
6-6-4 Gyro Operation 6-77
6-6-5 Sequence Operation 6-78

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
7-1 Abnormal State Display 7-2
7-2 Abnormality Details/Causes and Recovery Methods 7-3
7-3 Spindle Judgment: Checking REJECT Reason 7-15
7-4 Ethernet Communication 7-16
7-5 RTC (Real Time Clock Setup) 7-18
Table of Contents
Chapter 8 Options
8-1 CompactFlash (CF) Card 8-2
8-1-1 Summary 8-2
8-1-2 Selection Criteria 8-3
8-1-3 CF Access LED 8-3
8-1-4 Storing Data in the CF Memory Card 8-4
8-1-5 Data Storage Flow 8-4
8-1-6 Checking the capacity of CF Memory Card 8-7
8-1-7 Formatting the CF Memory Card 8-8
8-2 Expansion RS232C Interface 8-9
8-3 ID Data Input Setting 8-10

Chapter 9: Fieldbus I/O Interfaces


9-1 Common Fieldbus Specifications 9-2
9-1-1 Fieldbus I/O Signals 9-2
9-1-2 Fieldbus Message Output Format 9-6
9-1-3 Fieldbus Interface Setup (HFC3000 Software) 9-8
9-2 EtherNet/IP 9-9
9-3 CC-Link 9-12
9-4 PROFIBUS DP-V1 9-35
9-5 DeviceNet 9-39
9-6 PROFINET IO 9-44
Revision History
Revision
Manual No. Content of revision Page
date
Jan, 2017 HFC3000E-HW-1 1st Edition(SupportingV1.000) – Release from DDK (S0140185-C)
2nd Edition (supporting V1.130) – Release from DDK (S0140185-G) Majority
Jan. 2019 HFC3000E-HW-2
English updated

Manual Numbering Convention

HFC3000E-HW-1
DSP1500 = Servo Press
AFC3000 = Nutrunner
FUSION = DC Hand Tool Version Number
HFC3000 = DC Hand Tool (Major Revision Level)

E = English Version
S = Spanish Version HW = Hardware Operation Manual
*Japanese Version furnished by DDK SW = Software Manual
uses DDK numbering convention.
Notes
Chapter 1 Outline

1
Chapter 1 Outline

PAGE 1-1
Chapter 1 Outline

1-1 How to Use This Instruction Manual


This manual describes the system structure, specifications, handling method, etc., of the Handheld
Nutrunner System.

These are described in the following order in this manual:

Chapter Items Contents

Chapter 1 Outline Description of functions


Chapter 2 Specifications General specifications of the system.
Description and function of the respective parts of the system
Chapter 3 System Description
components.
Installation procedure, dimensions, input and output signal
Chapter 4 Installation & Wiring
descriptions and requirements for PLC programming
Power up and Items to be checked before power up and procedures for
Chapter 5
Operational Tests operational tests.
Descriptions of items displayed on the front panel and
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation
instructions for setting the fastening parameter values.
Descriptions of abnormal operation conditions during
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
operation and corrective actions.
Chapter 8 Options Optional module description and setup
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces Fieldbus interface setting and functions

PAGE 1-2
Chapter 1 Outline

1-2 Features
The Handheld Nutrunner is a flexible fastening tool equipped with a compact, high-performance
servomotor developed especially for this product. Like the usual high-performance nutrunner system, it
is designed to accommodate various tool models and provide useful functions for error proofing, data
management, data communication, etc.

☆ Compact Design
The controller operates on single-phase 100V ~ 240V, making installation work related to the
primary power source easy.

☆ Fastening Functions
Fastening can be performed by the torque method or the angle method. An angle monitor and a
torque rate monitoring function are provided as functions for error proofing. A fastening counting
function can be used as an additional error proofing method.

☆ 64 Programmable Parameter Sets


64 selectable parameter sets are available for ‘on-the-fly’ model/torque setting changes
Work (parameter) selection can be performed by external signals.
Controller memory is non-volitile - a backup battery is not required, thus no need to worry about
problems such as dead batteries, battery maintenance, etc.

☆ Data Communication
An RS-232C interface is incorporated to enable data communication with external devices.
A dedicated Ethernet connector that enables communication with a PC (for dedicated software) is
provided. Connectors enabling sending of result data to a PLC or other external device are also
provided.
Optional fieldbus interfaces that allow fastening data to be sent of over the same fieldbus connection
to the PLC, can be installed. (ie. Ethernet I/P, Devicenet, Profinet, CCLINK, etc.)

☆ Motor
A permanent magnet High Speed DC motor provides for improved fastening control. The sealed
design of the motor provides greater protection from contamination without generating excess heat.
The resolver is uniquely designed to withstand harsh environments and provide high-resolution
control / angular feedback signals.

☆ Preamplifier
Quality control of the tool torque transducer is accomplished electronically (digitally) through the
EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) in the preamplifier. During
factory setup of the torque transducer, the unit is Dead Weight and Dynamically tested against
Standards that are certified and traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology.
The resultant data is then programmed into the preamplifier where it is stored on non-volatile
EEPROM. The preamplifier also contains the “Smart Tool ID” system that allows automatic tool
recognition and protects against misapplication of tools onto the wrong controller or set-up.

☆ Self-Check Function
Each time a fastening operation starts, a calibration check of the torque transducer is performed to
check functionality including those of the controller and the cables to prevent abnormal fastening.

☆ Abnormal Condition Display


When an Abnormal occurs, the corresponding abnormal state No. is displayed on the front panel.

PAGE 1-3
Chapter 1 Outline

☆ Fastening Result Record


Fastening resultant data is saved in a nonvolatile controller memory (approx. 12,000 cycles of data).
100 sets of torque curve data is stored in volatile memory (RAM).
100 sets of Reject curve data is stored in nonvolatile memory.
The fastening resultant data and the Reject curve data are therefore preserved even if the power is
turned off. However, the normal torque curve data is lost when the power is turned off. The above
data can be read with the User Console software.

●Fastening Result Storage Feature List of HFC3000 System


Function Name Automatic Save *1 Stored Data
HFC3000 Fastening
Curve Data Fastening Data
User Console Data
Setting Tab Preferences Auto Upload Stored Data
Storage Content Stored Data Curve Data Stored Data Abnormals
Storage Location PC Each controller
12000
Storable Records - 500 results
results
Setting Item Yes No
ACCEPT ○ ○ ○
REJECT ○ ○ ○
JUDGMENT

ABNORMAL ○ ○ ○ ○
BYPASS ○ ○ ○
STOP ○ ○ ○
RESET
○ ○ ○
STOP
START OFF ○ ○ ○
*1:’Automatic Save’ must be enabled during data collection in the Fastening Data screen of
the AFC3000 User Console

Function Name Stored Curve Data CF Card *2


HFC3000
Stored Curve Data -
User Console
Stored Curve Stored Reject Stored
Storage Content Curve Data
Data *3 Curve Data Data
Storage Location Each controller CF Card
Storable Records 100 results - -
Storage Format Torque-Angle (540deg) - Torque-Angle (180deg)
ACCEPT ○ ○ ○
REJECT ○ ○ ○ ○
JUDGMENT

ABNORMAL ○ ○ ○ ○
BYPASS ○ ○ ○
STOP ○ ○ ○ ○
RESET
○ ○ ○
STOP
START OFF ○ ○ ○ ○
*2:CF CARD Option and CF CARD are required separately.
*3:The stored (curve data) will be cleared when the control power of the controller is turned OFF.

PAGE 1-4
Chapter 1 Outline

1-3 Safety Precautions


To ensure the most effective and extended use of all equipment, adhere to the following precautions:
☆ Handling of tool
Tools can generate a large amount of torque during operation, and the reaction force is applied to the
Operator or mounting area of the tool. Therefore, tools must be installed in the proper positions and
with adequate reaction devices. Tools MUST be mounted either using their supplied mounting plate
or clamped only in designated areas of the tool or tool damage may result.

Keep in mind that the fastening tool is a strain gage based instrument and, although it has been
designed to withstand sudden shock, repeated shock (over time) could damage some components.
Therefore, support devices must be used whenever practical to ease in handling and operation of the
Fastening Tool.

☆ Fastening
Avoid fastening beyond the full scale torque. Do not use a duty cycle (the ratio of the tool “On” time
to Tool “Off” time) higher than 50%, even when the torque is below the full scale value.

☆ Cable Connection

• Use the specified/supplied cables for all system connections.


• Completely lock the tool cable twist lock connectors.
• PLC I/O cables must be run separate from any high voltage power sources or cabling, and must
not exceed 50 feet in length.
• GROUNDING of the controller is REQUIRED (Perform Class 3 grounding) – Make sure the
controllers power cable ground pin is connected to a proper ground or DANGER OF ELECTRICAL
SHOCK EXISTS. Supply primary power with a cable no SMALLER than 1.25mm2 (17AWG) or the
source voltage may drop below 80VAC and a Suply Voltage Abnormal may occur.

☆ Installation Environment

• Controller units must be located a minimum of 600 mm from high transient voltage sources such as
transformers, motor starters, AC inverters and AC contactors. If it cannot be avoided, the units must be
properly shielded.
DO NOT use at the following locations.
• Areas under direct sunlight.
• Areas where the environmental temperature is out of the 32 °~122°F (0° ~ 45°C) range.
• Areas where the relative humidity is below the 20% range.
• Areas where the relative humidity is above the 90% range.
• Areas where the temperature changes quickly, which may cause condensation.
• Areas where conductive powder, oil mist, saline, or organic solvents exist.
• Areas that have corrosive or combustible gases.
• Areas that have strong electric or magnetic fields.
• Areas where a strong vibration or shock could be transmitted directly to a Controller unit or tool.

☆ Static Electricity
Since the controller is composed of many electronic components including surface mount devices
(SMD), please be aware of static electricity. Excessive static electricity may occur at dry locations,
therefore we recommend the operator to touch grounded metal before operating the front panel
operation switches to discharge the static electricity charged inside the human body.

PAGE 1-5
Chapter 1 Outline

☆ Cleaning
Do not use any organic solvents, such as thinner, to clean a Controller or a tool. The solvent could
melt the surface paint, display overlay or penetrate inside and cause damage. A cloth dampened
with alcohol or warm water should be used to lightly wipe the components.

☆ Noise
The controller is made up of electronic components and sensors – therefore, make sure there is no
equipment that will generate strong electrical noise in the surroundings.
Make sure that the cables that connect the controller and the tool are not placed inside a duct, etc.,
together with a power source line or other wiring.

☆ Handling and Shipping


It is critical that FUSION System components are properly handled and shipped in order to maintain the
System's integrity. Adhere to the following requirements for shipping and handling:

• Loose FUSION System components must be individually packaged in an approved anti-static


container or wrap to prevent damage from electrostatic discharge.
• Adhere to Chapter 2 Specifications for environmental requirements.

PAGE 1-6
Chapter 2 Specifications

2
Chapter 2 Specifications

PAGE 2-1
Chapter 2 Specifications

2-1 System Specifications


Single-phase 100V AC~240V AC ±10%
Voltage
Power (5m cable for 100-120VAC provided as accessory)
Source
Frequency 50/60Hz

No vibration must be applied directly to the controller.


Installation environment Forced-cooling equipment or heating equipment is required when
using the Controller outside the following operating range.
Ambient
0°C~+45°C (Avoid freezing)
temperature
Operating Ambient
No more than 90%RH (Avoid condensation)
Conditions humidity
Operation Duty cycle: within 50% (within the prescribed time for one cycle)
range See “2-1-1 Duty Cycle Calculation.”
Ambient
-5°C~+55°C (Avoid freezing)
Storage temperature
Conditions Ambient
No more than 90%RH (Avoid condensation)
humidity
Ambient
-5°C~+55°C (Avoid freezing)
temperature
Shipping Ambient
No more than 50%RH (Avoid condensation)
Conditions humidity
Packing
Tight seal in static free environment
method
Indoors (no direct sunlight), free from corrosive gas, flammable
Environment
gas, oil mist, dust, and dirt.

2-1-1 Duty Cycle Calculation


The duty cycle for HFC series is calculated as follows.
Duty Cycle (%) = Rotating time ÷ (Rotating time + Downtime) × 100

2-1-2 Controller Specifications

Unit model HFC-B016 HFC-B024A

Motor model M50, M80 M50, M80, M120


Power source voltage Single phase 100 to 240V AC ±10%
Power source frequency Both 50/60HZ
Power consumption rating 80W 120W
11.3Ap 19Ap
Maximum momentary current
(at the time of motor max power) (at the time of motor max power)
Inrush current 38Ap/AC100V,76Ap/AC200V (no more than 50ms)
Power supply capacity 1.2kVA 1.9kVA
Ground fault interrupter
⊿I 30mA Max
(Sensitivity electric current)

PAGE 2-2
Chapter 2 Specifications

2-2 Performance
2-2-1 Fastening Performance

From 1/2 ~ Calibration torque


3σ/: X 5% or less
From 1/4 ~ 1/2 Calibration torque
Torque Accuracy
3σ/ X : 6% or less
(Accuracy in the case of in-house standard fastening.
*May differ according to application.)

Angle Display (minimum) 0.1 degree


Angle (internal control) 0.1 degree

Torque Transducer accuracy ±1% of full scale

Torque Transducer linearity ±0.5% of full scale

Fastening method Torque Method / Angle Method


Torque rate setting Three zones

2-2-2 Controller

CPU 32-bit RISC


・ETHERNET :1 port
・RS232C :1 port (Optional addition of 1 port)
Data communication
・Fieldbus :1 port (Option)
(Ethernet I/P, Devicenet, Profibus-DP V1, CC-Link, etc.)
·Torque
·Angle pulse
Analog monitor function ·Current
·Rotational speed
·Direction of rotation

PAGE 2-3
Chapter 2 Specifications

Controller MODEL Type:

HFC-B0** -*- *- *- *
Special Data Output N:none EN:EtherNet module
CF Module N:none CF:CF Card (RS232C-2)
I/O Terminal N:none IO:I/O terminal is attached
Fieldbus Type N:No Fieldbus CC: CC-Link
DN:DeviceNet PB:ProfiBusDPV1
PI:ProfiNet I/O EI:EtherNet I/P
Controller AMP 16: 16A 24A: 24A

2-2-3 List of Tools

◆Please use the following forms of tool model and contorller type

HFT- M -
Tool Shape
S:Straight A:Angle
T:T-Type P:Pistol
L:L-Type D:Driver
Motor Type
50:45W 120:120W
80:70W
81:
Maximum Torque

For any tools not indicated in the table, please contact FEC

Maximum Maximum Minimum Maximum


Tool Torque Rotation Rotation Rate
Tool Model Controller
No. Speed Speed
[N・m] [N・m/deg]
[rpm] [rpm]
4 HFT-015M50-A 15.00 1090 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
6 HFT-015M80-S 15.00 1895 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
5 HFT-025M80-A 35.00 1218 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
12 HFT-040M80-A 40.00 735 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
13 HFT-015M50-A1 15.00 1215 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
15 HFT-025M80-A1 25.00 1070 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
16 HFT-040M80-A1 40.00 648 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
7 HFT-060M80-A 60.0 446 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
19 HFT-080M80-A 80.0 330 1 999.99 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
8 HFT-130M80-A 130.0 203 1 999.99 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
14 HFT-015M80-S1 15.00 1600 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
18 HFT-040M80-S 40.00 694 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
11 HFT-040M80-T 40.00 694 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
27 HFT-015M50-P1 15.00 1190 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
30 HFT-035M80-P1 35.00 778 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A

PAGE 2-4
Chapter 2 Specifications
21 HFT-010M50-S1 10.00 1800 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
22 HFT-025M80-S1 25.00 1000 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
29 HFT-055M80-S 55.00 508 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
26 HFT-080M80-S 80.0 303 1 999.99 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
20 HFT-015M50-P 15.00 1000 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
3 HFT-060M80-T 60.0 420 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
25 HFT-060M80-P 60.0 500 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
17 HFT-015M80-A 15.00 1215 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
10 HFT-040M80-L 40.00 805 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
31 HFT-030M80-P1 30.00 980 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
D
32 HFT-060M80-P1 60.0 461 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
33 HFT-030M80-D 30.00 980 1 99.999 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
34 HFT-200M80-A 200.0 117 1 999.99 HFC-B016 / HFC-B024A
*The decimal point for the torque is the decimal point of the “Maximum Torque.”

Maximum Maximum Minimum Maximum


Tool Rotation Rotation
Tool Model Torque Rate Controller
No. Speed Speed
[N・m] [N・m/deg]
[rpm] [rpm]
35 HFT-080M120-A 80.0 557 1 999.99 HFC-B024A
36 HFT-130M120-A 130.0 316 1 999.99 HFC-B024A
37 HFT-200M120-A 200.0 206 1 999.99 HFC-B024A
38 HFT-300M120-A 300.0 144 1 999.99 HFC-B024A
41 HFT-055M120-S 55.0 861 1 999.99 HFC-B024A
42 HFT-090M120-S 90.0 488 1 999.99 HFC-B024A
39 HFT-130M120-S 130.0 318 1 999.99 HFC-B024A
43 HFT-200M120-P1 200.0 216 1 999.99 HFC-B024A
*The decimal point for the torque is the decimal point of the “Maximum Torque.”

PAGE 2-5
Chapter 2 Specifications

2-3 Functions
2-3-1 Main Functions

(1) Fastening Function


The HFC3000 SYSTEM is capable of the following fastening methods.

1. Torque method: Angle monitor, Torque rate monitor, 1/2/3 step fastening
2. Angle method: Torque monitor, Torque rate monitor, 1/2/3 step fastening

(2) Self-Check Function


When control power is turned “ON”, the values of the torque tranducer ZERO voltage and CAL
voltage are acquired (these are reference values used for fastening). Before each fastening cycle, the
ZERO voltage and the CAL voltage of the torque transducer are acquired and compared to the
reference values from the power on check before the fastening operation is executed to confirm
proper torque transducer operation (the self-check is not executed in the case of reverse operation).

(3) Bypass Function


When a PLC Bypass input signal is activated, the Bypass output signal is activated. In this condition,
the spindle will not START, REVERSE, CAL OR RESET. If a BYPASS condition occurs during the
fastening operation, the fastening operation will stop.

(4) Abnormal Signal Output Function


Any system fault Abnormal state code numbers are displayed on the Controller (MFC) Unit front
panel.
If a system error occurs during a system check, connection check or overload check, an abnormal
signal will be output. In this situation, the STATUS LED (Red) on the unit will light up and an
abnormal state number and sub code will be displayed.
(5) Tool Type Checking Function
The parameter tool type and the connected tool type will be checked when the power turns on or the
tools are replaced. If the tool types are different, an abnormal will occur identifying that there is a tool
typre mis-match.
The tool ID contents are read in either of the following states;
1. If a tool is connected when the power is turned ON
2. When a tool is connected

PAGE 2-6
Chapter 2 Specifications

2-3-2 Fastening Method

(1) Torque Method (Angle Monitor)


Fastening is performed up to a preset Standard Torque.
The fastening operation is performed with the preset torque as the target, and high limit/low limit
judgment of the angle value is enabled.
The number of fastenings steps is selectable among 1, 2, and 3 steps.

(2) Angle Method (Torque Monitor)

Fastening is performed up to a preset Standard Angle.


The fastening operation is performed with the preset angle as the target, and high limit/low limit
judgment of the torque value is enabled.
Generally when a handheld tool is used, the angular precision may vary according to the state in
which the tool is held during fastening. Use in combination with a torque reaction device is
recommended.
The number of fastenings steps is selectable among 1, 2, and 3 steps.

(3) Differential Angle Check Method


Torque

Standard Angle

Rate 2 End Torque

Rate 2 Start Torque

1st Torque

Snug Torque

Differential Angle (fastening result) Angle


Differential Low Limit (-) Angle Differential High Limit (+) Angle

Seating point calculated from the value of rate 2

Fastening is performed from the Snug torque (angle measurement start torque) to the standard
angle value (or the standard torque value).
After completion of fastening, the seating point is calculated from the value of rate 2.
The differential angle is then calculated from the final torque value and the value of rate 2, and
judgment is performed if differential angle check is available.
Rate 2 is calculated from the rate 2 start torque and the rate 2 end torque.

PAGE 2-7
Chapter 2 Specifications

(Blank Page)

PAGE 2-8
Chapter 3 Sysytem Description

3
Chapter 3 System Description

PAGE 3-1
Chapter 3 System Description

3-1 Controller
3-1-1 Controller Front Panel

OK (ACCEPT) TOTAL OK
Lights when the Lights when acceptable NG (REJECT)
(OK) fastening results Lights when one of the
fastening results are are obtained for the preset judgment limits is
within all preset designated number of
ANGLE not met by the fastening
judgment limits, and times, and turns off
Lit when in the fastening results.
flashes while TOTAL when the batch reset
Angle result display mode. input signal is ON.
OK is ON.

TORQUE
Lit when in the fastening 3-digit 7-segment LED
Torque result display mode. COUNT/D-No.
Displays the cycle count
and parameter Data No.
6-dight 7-segment LED
Displays a set value,
fastening result, or other
data.
CAL
3-dight 7-segment LED Manual calibration check
Displays the WORK No. pushbutton
(parameter).

PRG
◁▷▵▿ Program mode select
pushbutton
Cursor buttons for
WORK, parameter, and
data setting.

RST
SET
Button for finalizing a Reset pushbutton
change of data

POWER
Controller main power
switch

PAGE 3-2
Chapter 3 Sysytem Description

3-1-2 Controller Bottom Panel

*RS232C-2 *Optional DATA REPORT


For ID data input ETHERNET

TOOL MONITOR
Connector for tool cable Connector for torque and angle
connection. analog monitor output connection.
Twist lock type connector. (PAGE 4-18)
Can be connected and
disconnected by twisting 90
degrees.
*CF Card
Stores fastening result data and
RS232C-1 curve data in Compact Flash.
Connector for output of fastening
result data.
Can be connected to a PLC, printer, ETHERNET
PC, etc. (Section 4-7). For HFC Software connection
PC
Ground Fault Breaker
When a ground leakage
occurs in the controller, cable,
or tool, this breaker trips
instantaneously to secure TB1,2,3
safety from the ground fault Connector for input/output signal
I…ON connection.
O…OFF Refer to separate section for signal
details and precautions (Sec. 4-5).

100~240V AC FIELDBUS Interface


Primary power input connector Communication interface for PLC
Operates on a single-phase I/O signals using this optional
50/60Hz power source. interface (DeviceNet, Ethernet I/P,
MUST provide secure CC-Link, etc., in accordance with
grounding.
user specifications (Section 9).

Note : * FIELDBUS, CF card, RS232C-2 and Data Report Ethernet are optional.

AXIS ADDRESS rotary switches (Set a “01” – Set “x10” to “0” and “x1” to “1” - Do not change)

PAGE 3-3
Chapter 3 System Description

3-1-3 Bottom Panel SW1 Switch Settings

The SW1 switches on the bottom panel are used to set special
functions related to fastening.
* Controller Power must be OFF when changing SW1 dip switch
settings.

Factory
No. Function Setting Details
Setting
・ Selects the acceptance range of the torque transducer ZERO
voltage level during the “Self-Check” of the Torque
Transducer ZERO
Transducer.
voltage level
Set this to ON if nuisance Self-Check abnormals (A1_3)
1 ON Acceptance
occur frequently at the start of cycle (due to outside forces or
window selection
vibration sensed by the torque transducer)
(±10%/±4%)
• ON: ±10% of full scale
• OFF: ±4% of full scale
・ ON: Deadman Type Start – Start input must remain ON for
the entire cycle – the cycle will stop if the START is removed
before the end of cycle (Requires continuous input).
START Input Type ・ OFF: Auto type Start – Start Input pulse (of at least 200msec)
2 ON
Selection intiates automatic cycle. The fastening operation will
continue even if the START signal is “OFF” after the cycle
starts.

3 OFF Disabled Used for in-house adjustment


・ When this is set to ON, the parameters are no longer stored
in the FlashRom and are stored only in SDROM (temporary
Parameter memory) When the parameter settings need to be changed
FlashRom storage dynamically (frequently) by PLC,(as an example), it is best to
4 OFF
disable use SDROM as the FlashRom life is shortened writing data
(disable/enable) to it.
・ When this is set to OFF, the parameters are stored in the
FlashRom as well.
5 OFF Disabled Used for in-house adjustment
6 OFF Disabled Used for in-house adjustment
7 ON Disabled Used for in-house adjustment
8 ON Disabled Used for in-house adjustment

PAGE 3-4
Chapter 3 Sysytem Description

3-1-4 Bottom Panel SW2 Switch Settings

The SW2 DIP switches on the bottom panel are used to change settings
related to functions of the controller.
* Controller Power must be OFF when changing SW1 dip switch
settings.

Factory
No. Function Setting Details
Setting
Used for in-house adjustment
Disabled
(Controller software version V1.219 or earlier)
1、2 OFF External Monitoring See the table below
ANGLE PULSE Output (Contorller software version V 1.220 or later)
3 OFF Disabled Used for in-house adjustment
OFF: Software PLC Function Disabled
Standard I/O Assignment is used
ON: Software PLC Function Enabled
4 OFF Software PLC Function
I/O Mapping for software PLC used
(Refer to Software PLC Manual- LD Editor)
This function available in Firmware Ver 1.305 or later
5 OFF Disabled Used for in-house adjustment
When this is set to ON, the STOP signal is not
required to operate the system.
PLC I/O STOP Fastening operation cannot be stopped by the
6 OFF (TEST Mode)
PLC I/O input signal “STOP”. Be sure to set this
(STOP signal Disable)
function to OFF if this equipment is to be put in full
operation.
7 OFF Disabled Used for in-house adjustment
8 OFF Disabled Used for in-house adjustment

●Angle pulse monitor output resolution


SW2-1 SW2-2 Resolution
OFF OFF
1.0 degree
OFF ON
ON OFF 0.5 degree
ON ON 0.1 degree

PAGE 3-5
Chapter 3 System Description

3-2 Tools
3-2-1 Angle Tool

Right angle hand-held type fastening tool provided with angle head, planetary gear, torque
transducer, servomotor, indicator LEDs, and operating switches.
Tool cable connector

② Reverse switch

High-speed servomotor

Torque transducer and


planetary gear ①Start switch

③LEDs for judgment and status indications

Angle head

①Starting switch: When the switch is depressed, the tool (output square drive) rotates for fastening.
When the switch is released (during rotation of the tool), the fastening (rotation)
stops. For normal fastening operation, the start switch must be held until
fastening is completed. (Deadman type operation)
②Reverse switch: Used to switch between normal and reverse rotation direction.
Ring (rotational) type switch – Rotate ring to switch between normal/reverse
operation (*in older models, this is a pushbutton type switch). When the reverse
rotation mode is selected, the judgment LED flashes orange.
When the start switch is turned ON in this state, the reverse (rotation) operation is
performed until the Start switch is released.

* When loosening a fastener that has already been fastened over 5N・m, the default
REVERSE HIGH TORQUE LIMIT setting will stop the reverse operation as a safety
Caution precaution.
This can be changed in the setting of the fastening REVERSE HIGH TORQUE LIMIT
parameter. If changed, be careful of torque reaction caused by higher torque.

③ Judgment / Status LED indicators (4 LEDs):


When the fastening result is OK (Accept), the green LED lights.
In the case of TOTAL OK (Total Accept), the green LED flashes.
When the fastening result is NG (Reject), the red LEDs lights.
In the reverse rotation mode and during power up, the orange LED lights.

* When using a tool-hanging clamp around the (Torque transducer/planetary gear area)
ensure the correct selection and do not over-torque the clamp or damage can result.
Caution Over tightening, the clamp can cause deformation of the tool case, affecting the rotation
of the tool and/or accuracy of fastening torque.

PAGE 3-6
Chapter 3 Sysytem Description

3-2-2 Pistol Tool


Pistol type hand-held type fastening tool provided with planetary gear, torque transducer, servomotor,
indicator LEDs, and operating switches etc.
High-speed servomotor
Torque transducer
and planetary gear

②Reverse switch
③LEDs for judgment and
status indications
①Start switch

Tool cable connector

①Starting switch: Starting switch: When the switch is depressed, the tool (output square drive)
rotates for fastening. When the switch is released (during rotation of the tool),
the fastening (rotation) stops. For normal fastening operation, the start switch
must be held until fastening is completed. (Deadman type operation)
②Reversing switch: Used to switch between normal and reverse rotation direction.
Ring (rotational) type switch – Rotate ring to switch between normal/reverse
operation (*in older models, this is a pushbutton type switch). When the reverse
rotation mode is selected, the judgment LED flashes orange.
When the start switch is turned ON in this state, the reverse (rotation) operation is
performed until the Start switch is released.

* When loosening a fastener that has already been fastened over 5N・m, the default
REVERSE HIGH TORQUE LIMIT setting will stop the reverse operation as a safety
Caution precaution.
This can be changed in the setting of the fastening REVERSE HIGH TORQUE LIMIT
parameter. If changed, be careful of torque reaction caused by higher torque.

③ Judgment / Status LED indicators (4 LEDs):


When the fastening result is OK, the green LED lights up.
In the case of TOTAL OK, the green LED flashes.
When the fastening result is NG (failure), the red LEDs light up.
In the reverse rotation mode and during initialization upon power activation, the
orange LED lights up.

* When using a tool-hanging clamp around the (Torque transducer/planetary gear area)
ensure the correct selection and do not over-torque the clamp or damage can result.
Caution Over tightening, the clamp can cause deformation of the tool case, affecting the rotation
of the tool and/or accuracy of fastening torque.

PAGE 3-7
Chapter 3 System Description

Memo

PAGE 3-8
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4
Chapter 4 Installation & Wiring

PAGE 4-1
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4-1 Installation Procedure


Follow the installation procedures of the HFC3000 System in the order prescribed below.

№ Item Contents Page

4-2
① Installation Controller mounting and dimensions.
PAGE 4-2

Connection of input power 4-3


② Input power connection
source PAGE 4-3

Connection between the controller rear panel (CN1) 4-4


③ Connection of tool cable
and tool PAGE 4-4

Connection of external control PLC Input / output signal Connection and control 4-5
④ signal
signals. PAGE 4-5

Power up after checking the wiring and checking the 5-1


⑤ Power up power source voltage. PAGE 5-1

Chapter 6
⑥ Set Parameter values Torque value, angle value, speed, timer, etc., settings
PAGE 6-1

5-2
⑦ Initial operation check Perform initial operation & checks.
PAGE 5-2

PAGE 4-2
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4-2 Controller Installation Dimensions


Mounting: 4 points (Rear panel) M6 screws: Use screws with a length equivalent to the installation plate
thickness +9mm.

Weight: 8.5 kg (18.7lb)

<Mounting Precautions>
◆ Do not install the unit at a location that is exposed to vibration.
◆ Install the controller at a location where the temperature, humidity, and other operating environmental
conditions are satisfied.
◆ Do not use a mounting screw longer than the above mentioned size.

PAGE 4-3
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

●Mounting (Spacing)

・For safe removal of the Controller,


Caution
install with spacing of 10mm or more (side to side)

100mm or more Upper

10mm 10mm
or or
more more

250mm or more
250mm or
more

Lower

PAGE 4-4
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4-3 Input Power Source Connection


Connect the dedicated power cable to the connector at a lower portion of the rear panel of the controller.
(A power cable is provided as standard.)

Primary power connector

• Cable supplied for 100-120VAC power (Standard U.S. plug Style) only.
Cable over 120VAC to be supplied by customer.

PAGE 4-5
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4-4 Tool Cable Specifications


■Tool Cable (Cable type: FEB-1309-M**) (For old model tools only (“-01A”, “-02A” suffix))
Total length L

Tool Side Controller side

■Tool Cable (Cable type: C15-F7-M**) (For new model tools only (“-10x”, “-20x” suffix))
Total length L

Tool Side Controller Side


(AWG16-4/AWG24-24) (#22 shell-19)

PAGE 4-6
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4-5 External Control Signal Connection

Digital Input / Output (DIO) Terminal Block: TB1,2,3

TB3 12
TB3: 12 terminals
*The No. 11 terminal at the plug side
lacks a alignment pin. (See below)

TB3 1
TB2 12 TB2: 12 terminals

TB1: 12 terminals

TB2 1 *The No. 1 terminal at the plug side lacks a


Alignment pin.(see below)
TB1 12

TB1 1

Connector Model: SL-4000CP-12PGY


Manufacturer: SATO PARTS
Rated applicable wire: Solid wire 0.8mm φ (AWG 20), stranded wire 0.5mm 2 (AWG 20)
Range of useable wires: Solid wire 0.4mm φ ~ 1.2mm φ (AWG 26 ~ AWG 16)
Stranded wire 0.2mm 2 to 1.25mm 2 (AWG 24 ~ AWG 16)
Wire outer diameter 0.18mm φ or more
Standard wire stripping length: 9mm (0.35”)
Note: One wire is connected to one terminal. Do not connect two or more wires to one terminal.

Checking hole

Wire insertion hole

Wire insertion releasing


lever

Top View

The No. 1 TB1 plug does not have an alignment pin.


The No. 11 TB3 plug does not have an alignment pin.

PAGE 4-7
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
4-5-1 Controller I/O Signals
Pin No. Signal IN/OUT Description of Function/Usage
TB3-1 IN COMMON IN Common input signal (bipolar)
TB3-2,11 +24V Service power +24V output When using this power supply, keep wiring away from
0.5Amax
TB3-3,12 GND supply GND electrical noise exposure.
The fastening process is stopped when this signal is set to “OFF.”
IN-1(A:NO/
TB1-1 STOP Selection between A contact and B contact type is possible.
B:NC)
System parameter: SYS.033[xx1xxx] 0: A contact/1: B contact
The fastening process is stopped and the fastening judgment of the
TB1-2 RESET IN-2(NO)
controller is cleared when set “ON.” (ID data is cleared as well.)
The tool rotates in reverse direction while “ON” and at the speed in
TB1-3 REVERSE IN-3(NO)
accordance with the selected WORK No. (Parameter)
When “ON”, the fastening process is started in accordance with the
TB1-4 START IN-4(NO)
selected WORK No. (“Deadman” specification).
TB1-5 PROGRAM(BYPASS) IN-5(NO) The controller is put in the BYPASS (PROGRAM) mode when “ON”.
When set “ON”, the self-check of the torque transducer (Zero Level /
SELF CHECK Cal level voltage check) will not be performed (normally before the
TB1-6 IN-6(NO)
DISABLE start of the fastening operation - the start of tool rotation can be
shortened by approx. 60msec).
TB1-7 WORK SELECT BIT 0 IN-7(NO)
TB1-8 WORK SELECT BIT 1 IN-8(NO) The WORK SELECT BIT 0 ~4 select signals enable selection
TB1-9 WORK SELECT BIT 2 IN-9(NO) among parameter Nos. 1 ~ 32 by a (Binary) combination of the 5 pin
TB1-10 WORK SELECT BIT 3 IN-10(NO) Nos. (See Work Select table further below)
TB1-11 WORK SELECT BIT 4 IN-11(NO)
TB1-12 BANK SELECT IN-12(NO) Bank select input signal (changes output signal definition)
TB3-4 OUT COMMON OUT Common output signal (bipolar)
TB3-5 BATCH OK RESET IN-13(NO) Cycle counter (ACCEPT count) reset signal
TB3-6 IN-14 NO Not USED
TB3-7 Bank Select Output OUT-6(NO) Output definition depends on status of Bank Select Input (TB1-12)
TB3-8 Bank Select Output OUT-7(NO) (See next page for output definition)
The Work Select Bit 5 enables selection of parameters 33-64 in
TB3-9 Work Select Bit 5 IN-15 NO
combination with Work Select Bits 0-4 (Firmware Ver. 1.301 or later)
Thw Work number selection by ID data input is enabled when ON.
TB3-10 ID Work Select Enable IN-16 NO
(Firmware Ver. 1.301 or later)
TB2-1 Bank Select Output OUT-1(NO)
TB2-2 Bank Select Output OUT-2(NO)
TB2-3 Bank Select Output OUT-3(NO) Output definition depends on status of Bank Select Input (TB1-12)
TB2-4 Bank Select Output OUT-4(NO) (See next page for output definition)
TB2-5 Bank Select Output OUT-5(NO)
TB2-6 Bank Select Output OUT-12(NO)
Turns ON when manually starting the reversed operation.
TB2-7 MANREV (RY1-1) OUT-8(NO) Turns OFF when the next fastening starts or turns OFF at RESET,
PROGRAM. (Relay contact-1)
Performs a duplication of the controller buzzer output of the REJECT
TB2-8 BUZZER (RY2-1) OUT-9(NO)
signal and Batch OK to external devices. (Relay contact-2)
Output when the fastening results are OK for the programmed number
BATCH OK (RY3-1) of cycles when using batch counting function (relay contact-3).
TB2-9 OUT-10(NO)
[TOTAL OK] Selection between pulse or constant output is possible.
System parameter: SYS.033[xxxx1x] 0: constant 1: pulse
TB2-10 RY-COM(RY1,2,3-2) OUT Relay contact-1, 2, 3 common
OK output for QL Accept signal (relay contact) (Relay contact-4)
TB2-11 QL OK (RY4-1)
OUT-11(NO) Selection between pulse and constant output is possible.
TB2-12 [OK] (RY4-2)
System parameter: SYS.033[xxxxx1] 0: constant 1: pulse
System parameter: SYS.033[xxx1xx] 0: 300ms/1: 800ms pulse length

PAGE 4-8
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4-5-2 Bank Select Output Signals

OUTPUT Definition with BANK SELECT (TB1-12) OFF

Pin No. Signal IN/OUT Description of Function/Usage


Output when the fastening operation ends with a fastening result
TB2-1 REJECT[NG] OUT-1(NO)
falling outside a judgment range.
Output when the fastening operation ends with the fastening results
TB2-2 ACCEPT[OK] OUT-2(NO)
being within the judgment ranges.
Output when an internal error occurs in the system or during the
fastening operation. (The Abnormal Code is displayed on front
TB2-3 ABNORMAL OUT-3(NO)
display – An Abnormal must be RESET before normal operation
may resume)
Output when the STOP signal is ON and the controller is ready to
TB2-4 READY OUT-4(NO) start a cycle. This signal is also output after the end of fastening,
regardless of the judgment.
TB2-5 BUSY OUT-5(NO) Output when the fastening process is in cycle
TB2-6 BYPASS OUT-12(NO) Output when the controller is in the BYPASS (PROGRAM) mode.
Fastening Result
TB3-7 OUT-6(NO) Output when fastening result data is available in the controller.
Data Available
Output when capacity of the CF card is less than 1%,
TB3-8 CF CARD FULL OUT-7(NO)
or CF card is not inserted

OUTPUT Definition with BANK SELECT (TB1-12) ON


Pin No. Signal IN/OUT Description of Function/Usage
TB2-1 WORK OUTPUT BIT 5 OUT-1(NO) Output confirmation of WORK SELECT 5 input selects bit
ON when the CF card remaining capacity is less than 200MB
CF Warning Output can be enabled on Firmware ver. 1.310 or later with the
TB2-2 OUT-2(NO)
(Compact Flash) following setting:
System parameter: SYS.032[x1xxxx] 0:Disabled / 1: Enabled
ON when the fastening operation is at the final stage of the batch
TB2-3 Batch Sequence END OUT-3(NO)
sequence. (Firmware version 1.310 or later)
TB2-4 WORK OUTPUT BIT 0 OUT-4(NO)
TB2-5 WORK OUTPUT BIT 1 OUT-5(NO) Output confirmation of WORK SELECT 0~5 input selects bits. Work
TB2-6 WORK OUTPUT BIT 4 OUT-12(NO) number (parameter number) is set from the WORK select inputs.
Used to confirm proper Work set before fastening starts.
TB3-7 WORK OUTPUT BIT 2 OUT-6(NO)
TB3-8 WORK OUTPUT BIT 3 OUT-7(NO)

・Turn OFF the input signal "BANKSELECT" during fastening operation or when not
using bank select function
Caution
·If using the BANK SELECT Input signal, wait for 20 msec or more after turning the
signal ON, before checking the output signal status.

PAGE 4-9
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4-5-3 Input and Output Circuit Specifications and Recommended Connection Circuit

Controller I/O circuit


DC power
Input circuit source

PLC output circuit


Input signal

Input signal

PLC input circuit

Output circuit
Output signal

Output signal

*The above diagram shows an NPN type connection example.

・ The HFC Unit may be wired for Sourcing (PNP) I/O by swapping the polarity of
the 24VDC power connections of the INPUT / OUTPUT COMMONS. (I/O Points are
Caution Bi-directional)

PAGE 4-10
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4-5-4 Description of I/O Signals


+24V、GND: SERVICE POWER SUPPLY PIN No.: TB3-2,3,11,12
User available power supply. (Limited to 0.5amp - in the case external power supply is not available)
Do not supply power to the [+24V] and [GND] terminals (24V DC service power supply) on the
controller. Doing so may cause damage to the controller.
Do not use for more than 0.5A. When using the service power supply use shielded cable and keep
away from the AC wiring or other high electrical noise generating devices.
Attach a clamp filter to the power supply line. (example ZCAT2032-0930:TDK)

[Input Signals]
STOP: EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL PIN No.: TB1-1
While this signal is input (“ON” state), the controller is put in the STOP state.
In the STOP state, the output signals are cleared and the fastening operation cannot be started.
When the STOP signal is input during fastening operation, spindle motion stops and I/O will be
disabled. The fastening result data immediately prior to stoppage will be held.
The ON/OFF input state of this signal can be selected by the system option 1 [SYS 033].
When the ON contact is selected, the signal must be input to put in the STOP state. When the OFF
contact is selected, the signal must be INPUT (NC) to run a fastening cycle.

RESET: RESET SIGNAL PIN No.: TB1-2


When this signal is input, the display data and the output signals of the controller are cleared. Also,
when the signal is input during fastening operation, the fastening operation will stop.

REVERSE: TOOL REVERSE SIGNAL PIN No.: TB1-3


While the signal is “ON”, the spindle will turn in the direction opposite to the tightening direction (ex. If
the tightening direction is set to clockwise, the spindle will turn in the counter-clockwise direction
during Reverse operation and visa-versa).
The spindle unit will be in BUSY status while in Reverse operation.

START: FASTENING START SIGNAL PIN No.: TB1-4


The controller checks the WORK SELECT signal and SELF-CHECK signal at the rising edge (“OFF”->
“ON”) of this signal and then starts the fastening process.
The rotation operation is started when this signal is “ON”.
After the start of fastening and during the complete fastening process, the controller outputs the BUSY
signal, the READY output signal is “OFF” and the START signal will no longer be accepted.
In the following conditions, the READY output signal is turned “OFF” and the START signal input
cannot be received: STOP condition, While fastening (when BUSY), While RESET is ON, Bypass
conditionor during an Abnormal condition.
When a START is input, the output judgment signal(s) and the previous fastening data are reset.

BYPASS: BYPASS SIGNAL PIN No.: TB1-5


While this signal is “ON,” the controller is put in the PROGRAM mode, the BYPASS signal is output,
and fastening cannot be started.
If the BYPASS mode is entered during fastening, the fastening process is stopped.

SELF CHECK: TORQUE TRANSDUCER AUTOMATIC CHECK SIGNAL PIN No.: TB1-6
When this signal is “OFF” (or unconnected) at the time of a START signal input, the zero voltage level
and CAL voltage level of the torque transducer is automatically checked before the fastening cycle
begins.
If the automatic check of the torque transducer is not required, turning “ON” this signal at the time of a
START signal input, will cause this test not to be performed.
Once a Self Check is completed, the unit holds the check value until control power is turned off or
another check is performed.

PAGE 4-11
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

BATCH OK RESET: BATCH COUNTER RESET SIGNAL PIN No.: TB3-5


After performing fastening for the set number of times (when using the Batch count feature), the cycle
count value is cleared automatically at the start of the next fastening process. The count will also be
cleared with this signal.
If the WORK SELECT has been input to TB1 or changed on the front panel of the controller, the
current cycle count value is cleared by input of this reset signal.

BANK SELECT: OUTPUT SIGNAL BANK SELECT SIGNAL PIN No.: TB1-12
The signal definition of the eight output signals are changed by switching ON/OFF the BANK SELECT
signal.

UNUSED PIN No.: TB3-6,


This is not used.

WORK SELECT 0 ~ 4: Work Select Signals PIN No.: TB1-7 ~ 11


WORK SELECT 5: Work Select Signals PIN No.: TB3-9
A parameter set can be selected ‘on the fly’ by using the Work SELECT inputs (Up to 64). They can be
selected by a combination of the WORK SELECT 0 ~ WORK SELECT 5 input signals (selection for up
to 64 parameters (Work Select bit 5) can only be used from a Fieldbus interface or from the front
display panel). (Work Select Bit 5 firmware ver. 1.310 or later)

WORK SELECT WORK SELECT WORK SELECT WORK SELECT WORK SELECT WORK SELECT
WORK
5 4 3 2 1 0
No.
PIN No.:TB3-9 PIN No.: TB1-11 PIN No.: TB1-10 PIN No.: TB1-9 PIN No.: TB1-8 PIN No.: TB1-7
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 1
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON 2
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) 3
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON 4
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 5
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON 6
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) 7
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON 8
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 9
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON 10
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) 11
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON 12
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 13
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON 14
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) 15
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON ON 16
OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 17
OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON 18
OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) 19
OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON 20
OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 21
OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON 22
OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) 23
OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON 24
OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 25
OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON 26
OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) 27
OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON 28
OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 29
OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON 30
OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) 31
OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON ON ON 32

PAGE 4-12
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

(Continued from previous page)


WORK SELECT WORK SELECT WORK SELECT WORK SELECT WORK SELECT WORK SELECT
WORK
5 4 3 2 1 0
No.
PIN No.:TB3-9 PIN No.: TB1-11 PIN No.: TB1-10 PIN No.: TB1-9 PIN No.: TB1-8 PIN No.: TB1-7
ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 33
ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON 34
ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) 35
ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON 36
ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 37
ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON 38
ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) 39
ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON 40
ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 41
ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON 42
ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) 43
ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON 44
ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 45
ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON 46
ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) 47
ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON ON 48
ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 49
ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON 50
ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) 51
ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON 52
ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 53
ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON 54
ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) 55
ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON 56
ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 57
ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON 58
ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) 59
ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON 60
ON ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 61
ON ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON 62
ON ON ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) 63
ON ON ON ON ON ON 64

ID SELECT ENABLE:ID SELECT ENABLE SIGNAL PIN No.: TB3-10


With System parameter: SYS D - No 411 "External Input Select" set to "ID Input", the ID selection
from the “ID Data INPUT” becomes enable by setting this signal to “ON”.
The WORK number can then be selected by the input ID Data (sent through RS232 or Fieldbus
Message) (ASCII character · maximum 32 characters)
If the SYS D-No 411 external input selection is set to "Input ID" and this signal is "OFF", select the
WORK number from the PLC I/O.
External input Select is setup using the HFC UserConsole "Graphic style parameter setup” selection
and selecting the (System parameter) from the pulldown menu.
This signal can be used with Controller software version V1.301 or later.

PAGE 4-13
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
[Output Signals]
When an output signal is “ON,” the voltage at the corresponding output terminal is at the same level as
the output common voltage (0V if wired for NPN, 24V if wired for PNP).

MANREV / RELAY CONTACT-1 SIGNAL PIN No.: TB2-7 OUT-8


RELAY CONTACT –COM SIGNAL PIN No.: TB2-10
Turns ON by manually starting the reverse operation (By TB1 REVERSE signal or by tool REVERSE
switch on and trigger activated) .
Turns OFF when the next fastening starts, or turns “OFF” at RESET, BYPASS/PROGRAM.
For details, refer to Section 4-5-5 [MANREV signal timing chart]

RELAY CONTACT-2 SIGNAL PIN No.: TB2-8 OUT-9


RELAY CONTACT –COM SIGNAL PIN No.: TB2-10
Duplicates the controller BUZZER - Performs output of the REJECT and Batch OK signals to
external devices according to the timing below.
Turns ON for 0.4 seconds by the BATCH OK signal rising edge.
Turns ON for 0.1 seconds by the QL OK signal rising edge.
Note: if using for a REJECT signal, signal must be ON for more than 0.4sec to signify REJECT

RELAY CONTACT-3 SIGNAL PIN No.: TB2-9 OUT-10


RELAY CONTACT –COM SIGNAL PIN No.: TB2-10
Relay is ON when the fastening has been performed for the number of times specified by the Batch
cycle count.

QL OK RELAY CONTACT-4 SIGNAL PIN No.: TB2-11 OUT-11


QL OK RELAY CONTACT-4 SIGNAL PIN No.: TB2-12 OUT-11
OK output for the QL signal
[QL OK] [BATCH OK] Timing Chart
D-No.540: Cycle count = 5

ACCEPT

QL OK

BATCH OK

D-No/COUNT c01 c02 c03 c04 c05 → c01



Clear at BATCH OK RESET, count starts after “c00”.
c00 → c01
BATCH OK RESET

PAGE 4-14
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
OUTPUT BANK [OFF]

As shown below, the output signal at each terminal takes on one of two definitions in accordance with the
combination with the BANK SELECT Input signal being either OFF or ON.

BANK SELECT OFF ON


TB2-1 REJECT(NG) WORK SELECT 5 OUT-1
TB2-2 ACCEPT(OK) CF WARNING* OUT-2
*Firmware version 1.310 or later
TB2-3 ABNORMAL BATCH SEQ. END* OUT-3
TB2-4 READY WORK SELECT 0 OUT-4
TB2-5 BUSY WORK SELECT 1 OUT-5
TB3-7 RESULT DATA WORK SELECT 2 OUT-6
TB3-8 CF CARD FULL WORK SELECT 3 OUT-7
TB2-6 BYPASS WORK SELECT 4 OUT-12

NG: FASTENING REJECT SIGNAL PIN No.: TB2-1 OUT-1


Output when the fastening result falls outside programmed limits.

OK: FASTENING ACCEPT SIGNAL PIN No.: TB2-2 OUT-2


Output when the fastening result is acceptable within the programmed limits.

ABNORMAL: SYSTEM ERROR / ABNORMAL PIN No.: TB2-3 OUT-3


Output when a system fault / error is detected during a system check or during the fastening process.
When an error occurs, fastening is stopped immediately and the fastening results data is stored.
Normal process cannot begin until the problem is corrected and a RESET signal is input.

READY SIGNAL PIN No.: TB2-4 OUT-4


Output when the system is in the READY condition. Indicates system is ready to operate and inputs
are enabled. This signal is inactive (off) in the following conditions:
• During the initialization process when power is turned on (for approx.. 5 sec.)
• STOP condition
• While fastening is in process (when BUSY)
• While Reset signal is on
• Bypass condition
• Abnormal condition
• When a START or REVERSE signal is on
• During a CAL check
• When operation of the system by an external input is impossible

BUSY SIGNAL PIN No.: TB2-5 OUT-5


Output when the controller is in cycle for a fastening process.

FASTENING RESULT DATA AVAILABLE SIGNAL PIN No.: TB3-7 OUT-6


Output “ON” when the fastening results are available to be collected via the HFC software.
This signal turns “OFF” after data collection has completed and can be used to monitor that the
HFC3000 software is monitoring / collecting data (when AFC3000 Software is used)

CF CARD FULL PIN No.: TB3-8 OUT-7


Output when capacity of the (Optional) CF card is less than 1%, or CF memory card is not inserted

BYPASS SIGNAL PIN No.: TB2-6 OUT-12


Output when in the BYPASS / PROGRAM mode.

PAGE 4-15
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

OUTPUT BANK [ON]

CF WARNING PIN No.: TB2-2 OUT-2


ON when the remaining capacity of the CF (compact flash) card is less than 200MB
(firmware version 1.310 or later)

BATCH SEQUENCE END PIN No.: TB2-3 OUT-3


ON when using the BATCH SEQUENCE function (fastening parameter D-No. 580 is set to “1”) and
the sequence has reached the final stage (operation is completed)
(firmware version 1.310 or later)

WORK OUTPUT 0 ~ 5: WORK SELECTION INPUT CONFIRMATION


Output confirmation of the WORK SELECT 0~5 input selections. These bits are active according to
what parameter is set from the Work Select inputs.
Used to confirm proper selection before starting a fastening cycle.

WORK WORK WORK WORK WORK WORK


WORK
OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 0
No.
PIN No.:TB2-1 PIN No.: TB2-6 PIN No.:TB3-8 PIN No.:TB3-7 PIN No.:TB2-5 PIN No.:TB2-4
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 1
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON 2
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) 3
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON 4
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 5
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON 6
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) 7
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON 8
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 9
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON 10
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) 11
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON 12
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 13
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON 14
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) 15
OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON ON 16
OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 17
OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON 18
OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) 19
OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON 20
OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 21
OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON 22
OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) 23
OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON 24
OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 25
OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON 26
OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) 27
OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON 28
OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 29
OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON 30
OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) 31
OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON ON ON 32

PAGE 4-16
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
(Continued from previous page)
WORK WORK WORK WORK WORK WORK
WORK
OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 0
No.
PIN No.:TB2-1 PIN No.: TB2-6 PIN No.:TB3-8 PIN No.:TB3-7 PIN No.:TB2-5 PIN No.:TB2-4
ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 33
ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON 34
ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) 35
ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON 36
ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 37
ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON 38
ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) 39
ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON 40
ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 41
ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON 42
ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) 43
ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON 44
ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 45
ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON 46
ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) 47
ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON ON 48
ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 49
ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON 50
ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) 51
ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON ON 52
ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 53
ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) ON 54
ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON OFF(OPEN) 55
ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON ON 56
ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 57
ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) ON 58
ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON OFF(OPEN) 59
ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON ON 60
ON ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) OFF(OPEN) 61
ON ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) ON 62
ON ON ON ON ON OFF(OPEN) 63
ON ON ON ON ON ON 64

PAGE 4-17
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4-5-5 Input/output signal timing chart

●Basic control signals (Controller firmware ver. 1.304 or later)

*1) WORK SELECT requires a response time of 100 msec or more after the READY signal
(ON) is output until the START signal is input.
*2) After the fastening operation completes, a wait time of 200 msec or more is required to
input the next START signal. If the START signal is continually input, another cycle
cannot be performed (until the START signal transitions to OFF one time).
*3) An input time of 100msec or more is required for the RESET signal or the STOP signal.
Caution
If the signal is continually input, another cycle cannot be performed.
*4) When the Data Save operation completes, the RS232C data communication output is
performed only once for approximately 90 msec. (Before firmware ver. 1.303, the
RS232C data output is performed after the fastening operation is complete)
To acquire the fastening result data to a PC, start the communication by the START
signal input timing (BUSY signal ON).

PAGE 4-18
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

●Basic control signals(Controller software version V 1.303 or earlier)

●MANREV Output signal timing chart


BANK Output

Fastening Fastening

Reverse Reverse

PAGE 4-19
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4-6 External Monitoring Device Signal

This auxiliary connector is used to output Torque, Angle, Current & Speed signals to external equipment
for monitoring purposes (X-Y Plotter, etc). The signals output from this connector are the same signals
that the system receives during the fastening process. This connection is not required for the system to
operate.

MONITOR
Compatible connector
D-SUB 9-pin plug Inch thread (#4-40)

External monitor signal specifications


Pin No. Signal IN/OUT Description
1 EA2 OUT Disabled
2 EB2 OUT Disabled
3 ANGLE PULSE OUT Angle pulse monitor output
4 ANGLE CW/CCW OUT CW/CCW monitor output
5 GND - Monitor signal output GND
6 TD2 OUT Disabled
7 MON1 OUT Current monitor output (10V: maximum current)
8 MON2 OUT Speed monitor output (10V: max.rotation speed)
9 TORQUE OUT OUT Torque analog voltage monitor output

TORQUE OUT: Torque Analog Voltage Signal


Monitoring voltage is indicated from zero torque to full scale torque and the potential difference is
3.7V. The zero voltage is the voltage when the tool is unloaded (nothing connected to the output
shaft and no torque applied).
※The zero voltage is not 0V.(Origin voltage range: -0.4V~+0.4V)
In addition, the zero voltage of each tool may vary even for the same type of tool.
(Ex: If the zero voltage is -0.3V and the voltage at full scale torque is +3.4V, the voltage change is
⊿3.7V.)
ANGLE PULSE: Angle Pulse Signal (5V TTL signal)
Angle pulse will output one pulse for one degree of rotation (at tool output square drive)
※This may differ from the actual rotation angle
(The range of pulses when rotating the end of the tool once is 358~362pulses.)
ANGLE CW/CCW Rotation Direction Signal (5V TTL signal)
Signal is output “high” when the motor is rotating in the normal CW direction and “low” signal when
the motor is rotating in CCW (reverse) direction.
1deg
Angle Pulse Signal

CW/CCW Signal

CW Rotation Suspension Suspension


Operation State
CCW Rotation

PAGE 4-20
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4-6-1 How to Calibrate the External Monitoring Device


When pressing the CAL button on the unit display device, the torque voltage is output to the TORQUE
OUT pin with the voltage potential difference of approximately ⊿3.7V (from tool ZERO level)
At the same time, the torque value detected on the tool is displayed on the DATA display screen.
Set the same torque value by using the external monitoring device to adjust the torque voltage.
(The zero torque voltage at no load is not 0V)
The voltage value of each tool varies. Therefore, the zero point needs to be corrected by using the
external monitoring device.

The CAL voltage value is indicated at the


upper Display.

Press the CAL button.

Output Circuit
●Torque, Current, Speed Voltage Output ●Angle Pulse, Normal/Reverse Output
TTL (5V) output
Op amp output: 0 ~ ±5V

+/- 25mA max

+/- 25mA max

●Current, Speed Voltage Output

Op amp output: 0 ~ ±10V

PAGE 4-21
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4-7 RS-232C Interface Signal


4-7-1 RS232C Specifications (RS232C-1)

The fastening result data is output in ASCII format from the RS232C output port. (Port is an output ONLY)

The default setting of the RS232C ports are indicated below and can be confirmed in the parameter
settings [Data No. 207 – 211] in the system setting mode. (PAR No. indicated by “SYS” on display)

Compatible connector
D-SUB 9-pin socket Inch thread (#4-40)

RS232C-1
4-7-2 RS232C Communication Specifications
Start-stop Communication
Synchronizing Method 9600bps(fixed)
Synchronization method Speed
Communication Mode Half-duplex system Start Bit 1 bit(fixed)
Data Bit 8 bits(fixed) Stop Bit 1 bit(fixed)
Flow control None Parity None(fixed)

Pin No. Signal IN/OUT Details


1 NC - Not used
2 RXD IN Not used
3 TXD OUT Operation result data output
4 DTR OUT Always ON output
5 GND - Signal ground
6 NC - Not used
7 RTS OUT Always ON output
8 NC - Not used
9 NC - Not used

・Clear the PLC receiving buffer when the controller power is turned on.
The effect of electrical noise could cause inaccurate or ‘junk’ data being received.

●Connection Diagram with data ‘dump’ (no handshaking)


Controller Side Data Collect Side

D-SUB 9-pin socket D-SUB 25-pin plug (9-pin socket)


TXD 3 3(2) RXD (result data output)
RXD 2 2(3) TXD (not used)
DTR 4 20(4) DTR
6(6) DSR
RTS 7 4(7) RTS
5(8)CTS
GND 5 7(5) GND

PAGE 4-22
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4-7-2 Data Format (RS232C-1)


The fastening resultant data is output from the RS232C-1 interface at the end of fastening. The data
length of the fastening result data in ASCII format is 79 bytes (corresponding to 79 characters) per
single fastening operation. The format of the data output is shown below.

・ Note that the decimal point differs according to tool model (size).
・ The output data of each item are indicated in a right-justified manner.
Caution

●Output Data Format (in the case of ASCII format, with torque being indicated to 2 decimal places and the
rate is indicated to 3 decimal places)
When the fastening judgment is normal (ACCEPT)
COUNT No. : Incremented by +1 at each fastening (stored even when power is shut down)
ACCEPT COUNT: Counted number of ACCEPT fastening judgments
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
COUNT No. ACCEPT CONTROLLER
No. WORK No.
COUNT
30H 30H 30H 31H 30H 31H 30H 31H 20H 20H 30H 31H 20H 20H
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
PEAK TORQUE JDG OCR FINAL ANGLE JDG OCR
31H 32H 2EH 33H 34H 20H 20H 20H 20H 31H 32H 33H 20H 20H
1 2 . 3 4 1 2 3

29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
FINAL TORQUE JDG OCR RATE1 JDG OCR
31H 32H 2EH 33H 34H 20H 20H 20H 30H 2EH 31H 32H 33H 20H 20H 20H
1 2 . 3 4 0 . 1 2 3

45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
RATE2 JDG OCR RATE3 JDG OCR
30H 2EH 31H 32H 33H 20H 20H 20H 30H 2EH 31H 32H 33H 20H 20H 20H
0 . 1 2 3 0 . 1 2 3

61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76
1ST TIME JDG OCR 2ND TIME JDG OCR
20H 31H 30H 2EH 30H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 32H 2EH 30H 20H 20H 20H
1 0 . 0 2 . 0

77 78 79 (JDG: Judgment, OCR: Original Cause of Reject)


JDG CR LF
4FH 0DH 0AH [PEAK TORQUE] JUDGMENT
"H"(48H): HIGH REJECT "L"(4CH): LOW REJECT
O "A"(41H): ABNORMAL "S"(53H): STOP
"B"(42H): BYPASS “R”(52H): RESET
TOTAL JUDGMENT “D” (44H): START OFF (Off operation by lever performed during
"O"(4FH): Fastening judgment fastening)
ACCEPT The OCR will identify the cause of the initial reject item and is not set in
the case of Judgments of "A," "B," "S," “R,” or “D.” above (see REJECT
fastening judgment output data example)

[FINAL TORQUE], [ANGLE], [RATE], [TIME] JUDGMENT


"H"(48H): HIGH REJECT "L"(4CH): LOW REJECT

PAGE 4-23
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

When the fastening judgment is NG (REJECT)


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
COUNT No. ACCEPT AXIS No.
WORK No.
COUNT
30H 30H 30H 31H 39H 39H 30H 31H 20H 20H 30H 31H 20H 20H
0 0 0 1 9 9 0 1 0 1

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
PEAK TORQUE JDG OCR FINAL ANGLE JDG OCR
20H 31H 2EH 32H 33H 4CH 20H 20H 20H 20H 35H 30H 4CH 20H
1 . 2 3 L 5 0 L

29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
FINAL TORQUE JDG OCR SIGN RATE1 JDG OCR SIGN

20H 31H 2EH 32H 33H 4CH 20H 20H 30H 2EH 31H 32H 33H 20H 20H 20H
1 . 2 3 L 0 . 1 2 3

45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
RATE2 JDG OCR SIGN RATE3 JDG OCR
30H 2EH 31H 32H 33H 20H 20H 20H 31H 2EH 31H 32H 33H 48H 58H 20H
0 . 1 2 3 1 . 1 2 3 H X

61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76
1ST TIME JDG OCR 2ND TIME JDG OCR
20H 31H 30H 2EH 30H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 32H 2EH 30H 20H 20H 20H
1 0 . 0 2 . 0

77 78 79
1st CAUSE OF REJECT (OCR)
JDG CR LF “X” (58H):This is set for the initial cause of
58H 0DH 0AH the REJECT condition during this cycle
X

(JDG: Judgment, OCR: Occurrence)


TOTAL JUDGMENT
"X"(58H): Fastening
[PEAK TORQUE] JUDGMENT
judgment REJECT
"H"(48H): HIGH REJECT "L"(4CH): LOW REJECT
"A"(41H): ABNORMAL "S"(53H): STOP
"B"(42H): BYPASS “R”(52H): RESET
“D” (44H): START OFF (Start trigger was released during fastening)
The OCR will identify the cause of the initial reject item and is not set in the
case of Judgments of "A," "B," "S," “R,” or “D.” above (see REJECT fastening
judgment output data example)

[FINAL TORQUE], [ANGLE], [RATE], [TIME] JUDGMENT


"H"(48H): HIGH REJECT "L"(4CH): LOW REJECT

PAGE 4-24
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4-8 Ethernet Interface


The Ethernet interface is the TCP/IP Ethernet port dedicated to communication with the HFC3000
User Console installed in a PC with Windows®.
A commercially available Ethernet cable (crossover/straight) can be used. (CAT5 or higher)

The TCP/IP factory settings of the controller are shown below. The settings of the connecting PC
side must be changed to connect to these settings when making the first connection. (The Ethernet
IP settings can be changed once connected)

IP address 192.168.11.10 (factory setting)

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0(factory setting)

Default Gateway 192.168.11.1 (factory setting)

Communication Protocol IEEE 802.3 compliant

Ethernet Standard 100BASE-T

Communication Speed 100Mbps

Cable Category 5 or higher (category 5 is recommended)

Connector Shape RJ-45

● 1-to-1 Direct Communication with the PC


PC Controller (Bottom)

Ethernet Crossover Cable*

*Newer PC’s have auto-detect Ethernet hardware for signal direction and may not require a
“Crossover” cable. A common Ethernet (Straight) cable would work if this is the case.

● Communication via an Ethernet Switch (Hub)


PC Controller (Bottom)
Ethernet Straight Cable

Ethernet Hub

PAGE 4-25
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4-8-1 TCP/IP SETUP PROCEDURE (Windows®)


The Ethernet settings on the PC side may need to be changed in order to communicate to the
controller via Ethernet. The “default” TCP/IP settings of the controller are set at the factory, however,
it’s possible they may have been user configured. You can confirm the current settings using the
controller display. The TCP/IP settings are confirmed by D-Nos. “011” to “016” of the SYSTEM setting
mode (PAR No. indication: “SYS”) of the Front Panel Display. The IP Address set in the controller can
also be changed using the front panel display (at the parameter Data Numbers listed below).
● Set Values of Factory Settings (System Parameters)

SYS D-No. “011, 012”: IP address


192.168.11.10
SYS D-No. “013, 014”: Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
SYS D-No. “015, 016”: Default Gateway
192.168.11.1
The TCP/IP setting method (in the case of Windows 7) is described below.
● Windows 7 setup
1. Select Control Panel from the Start menu.

2. Select “View network status and tasks” or “Network and Sharing Center” from the Control Panel.

・“Category” View ・“Large Icons” View

3. Select “Local Area Connection” from Network and Sharing Center.

PAGE 4-26
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4. Select “Properties” in Local Area Connection Status.

5. In Local Area Connection Properties, select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)” and then
select “Properties”.

PAGE 4-27
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

6. In Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties, select “Use the following IP address” and
change the IP address, the subnet mask, and the default gateway.

Match the values of the 3 upper positions to


the IP address set values of the Unit.

* Reference Example
IP address: 192.168.11.11
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway: 192.168.11.1

・Set the IP address of the PC so that it does NOT match the value set in the
controller (i.e. IP address must be a different number – if the controller is set as IP
192.168.11.10, then the PC can be 192.168.11.11, 192.168.11.12, etc.). If anything else
Cautio
n is on the same network, then make sure the IP address setup in the PC does NOT
match ANY other number in the network.
・Set the subnet mask of the PC to the same values as the factory set values of the
Unit.
・Make note or write down the settings that were used before you make this change,
you will most likely need to return the PC to the prior settings if you try to connect
back to your PC network.

7. Register the IP address in the HFC3000 User Console.

PAGE 4-28
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4-8-1 TCP/IP SETUP PROCEDURE (User Console Software)


1. If the TCP/IP settings of the controller are set to anything other than the default settings, then
the new IP address will need to be registered in the HFC3000 User Console Software.
The communication setting window is displayed automatically when the User Console software
is started. Or, if the AFC3000 User Console has already been opened, select “Communication
(C)” → “Communication Setting” in the Menu.

2. Select the communication setting window and then select the “Unit List” tab. Register the new
TCP/IP settings set in the controller you would like to communicate with.
2-1. Enter the station name (30 letters at max.).
2-2. Enter the IP address (0 to 255, 4 positions). (hit “TAB” or “→” to adv. to next position)

The settings will not be effective if the station name is not entered.
Caution

3. Return to the “Communication Setup” tab and select the station name you just entered in “ IP
Select,” pull down menu, then click “Connect.”

PAGE 4-29
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4-A. If connection with the Unit is successful, the “Connect” indication changes from
“Disconnect” to “[****]=[Connect]” (where **** is the IP address set in procedure 2.) is
displayed at the lower left status bar of the User Console. After connection succeeds,
reading and writing of respective set values, monitoring of fastening result indications,
etc. can be executed.

4-B. If connection with the controller fails, “Connection to IP address **** failed.” (where **** is
the IP address set in procedure 2.) is displayed and “[****]=[Connection Failure]” is
displayed at the lower left status bar of the User Console.

If another PC is already connected to the controller when Procedure 3 is


executed, “A communication error has occurred. Please confirm the
Caution communication status.” is displayed and thereafter, “Unconnected” is
displayed at the lower left status bar of the User Console software screen.

PAGE 4-30
Chapter 5 Power Up and Operational Tests

Chapter 5 Power Up and


5
Operational Tests

PAGE 5-1
Chapter 5 Power Up and Operational tests

5-1 Items to be Checked Before Power On


(1) Check connection between tool and Controller
Connect the cable between the tool and the controller securely.
Confirm the cable has no stress points when moving the tool. If the cable has any stress applied
while moving, fix cable management to reduce cable stress before powering up

(2) Check wiring for I/O signals


Connection with the external control equipment must be made at the terminal block on the rear panel
of the controller. (if being used)

(3) Use a dedicated cable for power source.


Confirm that the GROUND is connected at the power source of the power cable.

There is danger of fault or ELECTRIC SHOCK if the ground is not fully connected.
Confirm the the ground pin on the power cable is connected at the power source.
Caution Confirm the power source has a proper ground connection.

(4) Check the power source voltage


Check that the input power source voltage of the controller is in a range of single-phase 100V AC ~
240V AC.
The recommended wiring size for the primary power is no less than 1.25mm 2 (AWG16) If a voltage
drop occurs due to undersize wiring, etc., a ‘Source Voltage Abnormal’ error will occur. A voltage
drop may occur if an undersize wire is used across a long distance.

BE SURE TO CONFIRM THE ABOVE ITEMS BEFORE POWERING ON.

PAGE 5-2
Chapter 5 Power Up and Operational Tests

5-2 Items to be Checked When Powering On the Equipment


Confirm that the display changes as follows when the control power is turned on.

RUN Mode

Power activation

All segments are lit for


approx. 3 seconds

PROGRAM Mode

If “ABN” (Abnormal) is indicated in the upper stage of the indicator when the power is activated,
please refer to the troubleshooting chapter to identify and eliminate the cause, ensure safety, and
then reactivate the control power.

Follow the below safety precautions when powering on the controller.

【Caution: Powering the controller ON/OFF】


・After turning OFF the power, do not turn power back ON without a brief wait.
(recommended 20 seconds before turning power back on) Single or random
incidents of powering up with less waiting time is acceptable. However, multiple
attempts to power ON/OFF in succession may cause the following;
・The inrush current protection circuit may shut down the power supply circuit.
・If the power supply circuit automatically shuts down, the power supply circuit will
not work even if the control power is turned back on.
・Wait (with power OFF) for at least 5 minutes to reset the protection circuit before
powering ON.

PAGE 5-3
Chapter 5 Power Up and Operational tests

5-3 Input Initial Setting Data


After completion of the System verification/power on procedure, the system is ready for the input of data
required for fastening operation. Chapters 7 gives details on the types of information required and the
procedure for entering data into the System. The system will not run until this data is correctly set-up.

Programming should be performed using the FEC Inc. “HFC3000 Userconsole” software to simplify the
programming operation and to provide a means of creating a back-up file of the set-up.

NOTE: If the HFC3000 controller has data programmed already, it should be considered preliminary and
be adjusted according to actual process / part runs for optimal performance.

After the system is setup with the appropriate data, verify the controller has not been placed in BYPASS
[PROG} on display. Also, check that STOP is not displayed on the front display. If it is, the Stop signal is
being input from the external control equipment (PLC, selector switch, etc.) OR the system STOP state
has been programmed to require a STOP signal input before running [SYS Data No. 033].

Perform the following procedure from the front panel of the controller:

1) Zero Value Check


Press the RESET button on the front panel display and check that the value displayed on the
unit is at or near zero and the red NG (Reject) LED is not on.

2) CAL. Point Check


Press the CAL button on the front panel display and check that the red NG (Reject) LED is not
on.

Before performing the following tests, make sure nothing is in the area of the
nutrunner tool prior to activating a spindle or other moveable component.

3) Manual REVERSE Check

▪ Rotate the tool REVERSE ring switch so that the LED status lights flash yellow (Reverse
Mode). With the tool output not touching any part and held in the open air, pull the tool start
trigger and confirm the tool rotation is turning in the appropriate direction (opposite the
parameter preset fastening direction).

NOTE: : If any HFC Controller fails to rotate, correct the situation before continuing.
Confirm correct cable connections and that REVERSE Speed has been programming into the
controller parameter set.

4) Manual START Check


▪ (Confirm that the tool REVERSE ring switched has been switched back to the normal run
position) With the tool output not touching any part and held in the open air, press the
START trigger and verify that the connected tool runs in the correct direction until the
pre-programmed time elapses, creating a (time) reject.
▪ Press the RESET button on the Main operator panel to clear the REJECT light and
outputs from the HFC Controller.

5) External I/O Operation Check (when connected to a PLC)


Verify that the equipment will operate with an instruction from the external control equipment
(PLC, selector switch, etc.). Use the PLC to perform all of the I/O functions that are being used
(START, RESET, STOP, BUSY, ACCEPT, etc.).

PAGE 5-4
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

Chapter 6 Fastening Operation


6

PAGE 6-1
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-1 Changing between RUN and PROGRAM Modes


There are two modes of the handheld tool - the RUN (operation) and PROGRAM (setting) modes.
In the RUN (operation) mode, the fastening operation and the fastening result judgment are indicated.
Parameters can be changed in the PROGRAM (setting) mode.
Changing between the RUN and PROGRAM modes can be performed using the PLC I/O BYPASS
signal or the PRG key button (pressing the PRG button, holding for more than 1.5 seconds).

②Indication LEDs

①Operation/Check Switches
(Program Button circled)
③Switches for Data Indication
Operations

PAGE 6-2
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

(1) Controller Operation / Check Buttons


①CAL Button: CAL voltage check
When this button is pressed, a full scale calibration check of the tool torque transducer tool is
performed.
The calibration torque value is indicated in the “DATA” section of the display.
If as a result of the check, the value is within the specified ranges, the status LED on the tool flashes
alternately in green <--> orange.
If as a result of the check, the value falls outside the specified range, the status LED on the tool flashes
alternately in red <--> orange.

②RST Button
Used to reset the controller.
When this is pressed during fastening, the fastening is interrupted and all output signals are reset.
Additionally, the zero voltage of the torque transducer is checked and indicated (in the DATA display)
The RST button also resets the REJECT buzzer and any ABNORMAL condition from the controller.

③PRG Button: RUN / Program selection Button


Depressing this button for longer than 1.5 seconds, changes the operation mode from Run to Program
(or from Program to Run alternately).

(2) Indication LEDs


①OK LED Green [QL OK]
Lights when the fastening ends with all results within the various programmed setting limits.
When the TOTAL OK LED lights up, this LED is OFF.

②NG LED Red [NG]


Lights when the fastening ends with a result falling outside any of the various programmed setting limits.
Additionally, lights when a system Abnormal occurs (The abnormal code is displayed on the data
display).

③TOTAL OK LED Green [TOTAL OK]


Lights when the results of the fastening operations are all acceptable, the designated number of times
(cycle count).

④TORQUE LED Green [TORQUE]


Lights when the DATA content being displayed is a torque value.

⑤ANGLE LED Green [ANGLE]


Lights when the DATA content being displayed is an angle value.

(3) Buttons for Data viewing / Selection Operations


①SET key
This is used to finalize an indication or finalize data entered into memory.

②Cursor keys [▲][▼]


Used to scroll the data cursor and to change preset data.
Used to change the WORK No. in the run mode mode.
(Buttons cannot be used if an abnormal condition exists.

③Cursor keys [◄][►]


Used to change the display mode and to move the data cursor.

PAGE 6-3
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

(4) Tool Operation


A pistol type hand-held fastening tool is shown below for reference. Right Angle and Straight (inline)
are similar as far as operation switches and indicators (but may have slight differences)
Torque transducer High-speed servomotor
and planetary gear

③LEDs for judgment and


status indications

①Starting switch
②Reversing switch

Built-in torque
preamplifier, CPU &
gyrosensor Tool cable connector (bottom)

①Starting switch: When the switch is turned ON (by pulling), the tool output square rotates for fastening
operation.
When half way pulled in, initial speed is maintained (even if higher free-run speed is
programmed). However, if the initial time is set to 0 (seconds), this function is
cancelled.
When the switch is released during fastening (while rotating), the fastening (rotation)
stops. If the switch is released before switching to the 2nd speed, judgment is not
performed and therefore fastening results will not be generated. If the fastening
process reaches 2nd Speed and the switch is released, the rotation is stopped,
judgment is made and the data is output.
For normal fastening operation, continue to hold the switch in until fastening is
completed.
②Reverse switch: Used to switch between CW and CCW (Reverse) rotation
When switched to reverse rotation, the orange judgment LED flashes rapidly.
Reverse rotation operation is performed when using the start switch while in this mode.
When the start switch is released during reverse rotation, the operation stops.

* When loosening a fastener that has already been fastened over 5N・m, the default
REVERSE HIGH TORQUE LIMIT setting will stop the reverse operation as a safety
Caution precaution.
This can be changed in the setting of the fastening REVERSE HIGH TORQUE LIMIT
parameter. If changed, be careful of torque reaction caused by higher torque.

③LED for judgment and status indications (4 LEDs):


During the fastening process, all judgment LEDs are OFF.
If the fastening result is OK (Accept), the green judgment LED will light.
(In the case of TOTAL OK, the green judgment LED slowly flashes)
If the fastening result is NG (Reject), the red judgment LED will light (angle-related
Reject: rapid flashing; torque-related Reject: continuously lit up; other reject: slow
flashing).
During Initialization (upon power on), the orange* judgment LED lights. During
initialization, if the tool does not recognize the controller (communication
disconnected), the red LED flashing rapidly.
④CAL Check: operation only while the CAL button on the controller is being pressed.
If the result of CAL check is OK: The LED flashes rapidly in orange* <--> green.
If the result of CAL check is NG: The LED flashes rapidly in orange* <--> red.
* The orange color is made by the green LED and red LED lighting up simultaneously
(when viewed at a close distance, the red and green colors may appear separately).

PAGE 6-4
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-2 RUN Mode


When the power is activated (turned ON) and the initialization process ends, the (RUN mode) is entered.
In the RUN mode, mainly the fastening results, abnormal status, Axis No., parameters, etc., are
indicated.

Data Display Section (RUN Mode)

DATA Display
COUNT/D-No. Display

WORK Display

WORK COUNT/D-NO
DATA Display
In the real time mode, fastening result mode, and parameter (system) setting mode, the fastening
result, set value (parameter), or executed value is indicated here as designated by the
COUNT/D-No. Display.
WORK Display
The WORK No. is indicated here (if sequence operation is disabled, the parameter No. is
indicated). When an Abnormal occurs, the abnormal code No. is indicated.
COUNT/D-No. Display
In the real time mode, fastening result mode, and parameter (system) setting mode, the Data No.
of the preset data is indicated.
Also in the run mode, the current speed state is indicated while fastening and the current cycle
count value (C##) is indicated when the fastening operation has not started. The abnormal No.
sub code is indicated when an Abnormal occurs.

■Real Time Mode ■Fastening Result Mode ■Parameter Setting Mode


■System Setting Mode ■Run mode

_
_
Please refer to the following pages concerning the respective modes in the RUN mode.

PAGE 6-5
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-2-1 Changing Display Modes (in the RUN Mode)

Five modes can be selected while in the RUN state by pressing the [◄] or [►] push-button. By using
the [▲] or [▼ ] push-button, the display content can be changed. “Status Display Mode” is
automatically selected when the fastening starts and “Fastening Result Mode” automatically appears
when the fastening ends. The display change or mode change cannot be done while fastening is in
operation (while in Status Display Mode).
After activation Occurrence of error
of control power or start of fastening After end of
operation fastening

Real Time Fastening Result Parameter


Status Display
Display Mode Display Mode Program Mode
Mode
(COUNT Indication)

System Parameter
Display Mode

●Real Time Display Mode


When this mode is activated, the current executed values are displayed. (“non” appears in the PAR
No. display) The desired type of data can be chosen by pressing the [▲] or [▼] push-button.
This mode will be displayed when control power is turned on and also when the mode is switched
from BYPASS mode to RUN mode.

●Status Display mode


The speed condition during the fastening operation is displayed. (“Sxx” or “Pxx” appears in the
PAR No. display indicating the Sequence number or Parameter number being run) The fastening
Status display is displayed during the time between the beginning and end of the fastening operation.
In addition, it’s displayed when an abnormal condition occurs, when the STOP signal is turned OFF,
the BYPASS signal is turned ON, etc.
The selected WORK No. is changed with the [▲] or [▼] buttons.
(this function is disabled when work selection from the PLC I/O is enabled)
●Fastening Result Mode
The fastening results are indicated in this mode.
The fastening result content is changed using the [▲] or [▼] buttons.
When the fastening result D-No. [00 (PEAK TORQUE)], the COUNT value [c##] is indicated.
The final result is indicated automatically after the end of fastening.

●Parameter Program Mode


When in this mode, the fastening parameter data is displayed. (“P.xx” appears in the PAR No.
display – “.xx” being the parameter number being displayed 1-32)
The desired parameter can be chosen by pressing [▲] or [▼] push-button.

●System Parameter Display Mode


When in this mode, the system parameter data is displayed. (“SYS” appears in the PAR No. display)
The desired parameter can be chosen by pressing [▲] or [▼] push-button.

PAGE 6-6
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-2-2 Real Time Display Mode

In the real time display mode, “Non.” (Monitor) is indicated on the WORK Display.
By pressing the [▲] or [▼] push-button, the “D-NO” can be changed ±1.
The numbers can be advanced 5 at a time by holding the [▲] or [▼] push-button longer. “WORK”
“COUNT/D-NO” “DATA”

0 Torque Value Display

1 Torque Voltage Value Display

Mon 2 Maximum Torque Value Display

[▲] or [▼] button



(Advance 5 at a time by holding
down the button)
Fieldbus
1 9 Status monitor

Please refer to the “List of Contents Displayed in the Real Time Mode” regarding the respective
data contents indicated in the DATA Display when “COUNT/D-No.” is changed.

・When the CAL button is depressed or the RESET signal is input when any of the
D-Nos. 3 ~ 7 is displayed, the torque will not be indicated (the check being
performed will be displayed instead).
Caution
・When the CAL button is depressed or the RESET signal is input when in the Real
Time display mode, “CAL” or “RES” will not be indicated in the D-NO display
・"P - oFF" is displayed in the upper display when the drive power supply in the
controller is not yet turned on.

PAGE 6-7
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

●List of Contents Displayed in the Real Time Mode


COUNT/
WORK DATA Unit
D-NO

【Torque value display】


0 The torque value from the torque transducer is displayed in real time. Nm
The torque voltage that is converted to the full scale torque is output by
pressing [CAL] pushbutton.

【Torque voltage display】


The torque signal voltage from the torque transducer is displayed in real
1 time. mV
The torque voltage with about Δ3.7V potential difference is output by
pressing [CAL] button.
【Peak torque value display】(Peak torque value hold)
The peak torque, measured since the last time the [RESET] button was
pressed, is displayed in real time.
2 When the [SET] pushbutton is pressed during this display, the motor is Nm
locked for up to one minute allowing the spindle to be checked with a
torque wrench while displaying the reaction torque. Press RESET to
unlock the Motor before one minute has expired. WARNING: Do not
repeat this procedure repetitively or the motor will overheat.

【Angle rotation display】


3 The rotation angle of the output shaft since the last time the display mode deg
was switched to Real Time Display Mode is displayed. Turning the tool
output square will also read in this mode.

【Overload factor】
4 The current monitor load factor is displayed. If the load factor goes over %
100, an overload “A08-10” abnormal occurs
Non.
【Current value】 A
5
The current value in amps is displayed.
【I/O monitor】
12 bits of the standard Inputs/Outputs are monitored and indicated as shown in
the diagram below.
When [DIP SW2: SW. No. 6] on the bottom of the controller is ON, the display will
be as shown in the diagram below (IO-OFF) (external input/output disabling
function).
6 When the SET button is held, the outputs can be forced ON (at 0.5 second
intervals) in the order of the standard Outputs (bit 0 ... bit 11 from the left).
When [↑], [↓], [→], [←], or [SET] is pressed in the middle of forced outputs, the
forced output will end.
During forced output, fastening operation is halted.
Standard Input monitoring can be performed even during the use of forced
outputs.
【ZERO / CAL Voltage Error Warning】
If the CAL voltage or ZERO voltage, measured when the control power is
activated, when the self-check is performed at the start of fastening, when
the CAL button of the indicator is pressed, or when the RESET signal is
turned “ON,” is of an error warning value, the indication (V Warn) shown in
7 the drawing below will be indicated. When the RESET signal is turned
“ON” after the warning indication, the [------] is re-indicated.

【Tool Rotation Speed display】


8 The current rotation speed is indicated in real time during the operation of RPM
the tool. (Max. speed is displayed while motor is stopped)

PAGE 6-8
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation
9 [Tool Response•St1.] (0~255) Factory Adjustment only
10 [Tool Response•St2.] (0~15) Factory Adjustment only
[Tool Response•Ad1.] (0~255)
11 The actual sensing level of the starting trigger switch is indicated.

[Tool Response•Ad2.] (0~255)


12 The actual sensing level of the F/R slide switch is indicated.

[Tool Response•G. Gyrosensor Shake Detection Angle]


13 Deg
-2048° ~ +2047°

[Tool Command•Ct1.] (0~255) (Factory Adjustment only)


14 CAL ON, GYRO RESET, etc.

[Tool Command•Ct2.] (0~255) (Factory Adjustment only)


15 Angle conversion constant (fixed at 67)

[Tool Command•LEd.] (0~255) (Factory Adjustment only)


16 LED-related command

[Tool Command•BuZ.] (0~255) (Factory Adjustment only)


17 Buzzer-related command
18 [Tool Command•Gan. Gyro Restriction Angle] (0~255) Deg
[Fieldbus•Status Monitor•FbS]
Fieldbus connection condition: In the normal state, “4” is indicated.
19 Any other number indicates a disconnected state (STOP mode is activated and
operation is disabled).
[Angle Head Torque Variation [%]]
Displays the current torque variation rate of the angle head after the fastening
20 operation. %
When the rate exceeds the value set in D-No.541“[Angle Head Torque Variation]”,
A.09-10 “Angle Head Torque Variation Abnormal” occurs.
21-25 Factory Adjustment Only

D-No. 006: External I/O Disabling Function D-No. 7: ZERO/CAL Voltage Error Warning
(DIP SW2: SW No. 6 is ON)

AUX. Input (lit up if ON)


Batch reset input signal
D-No. 006: Simplified I/O Monitor
(DIP SW2: SW No. 6 is OFF) Standard Inputs (lit up if ON)
bit0 ... bit11

Standard Outputs (lit up if ON)


bit0 ... bit11

Lit up during forced output (all digits).

PAGE 6-9
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-2-3 Fastening Result Display Mode

The following data is displayed in Fastening Result Mode. In the fastening result mode, “r.” is indicated
at the 100s digit of the PAR No. indication part and the parameter No. (01 to 64) of the fastening
operation that was performed is indicated by the 10s and 1s digits. By pressing the [▲] or [▼]
push-button, the “D-NO” can be changed ±1. The numbers can be advanced 5 at a time by holding the
[▲] or [▼] push-button longer. *If fastening has not been started, “r.00” is displayed.

“WORK” “COUNT/D-NO” “DATA”

00 Peak Torque

01 Final Angle
r 0 1
Rate 1

02

r 6 4 [▲] or [▼] button


(skip 5 at a time by holding down)
36 ACCEPT count

Please refer to the “List of Contents Displayed in the Real Time Mode” on the next page regarding the
respective data contents indicated in the DATA Display when “COUNT/D-No.” is changed.

■Rate 1 (Low) ■1st NG Item (300=Rate 1) ■Rate 1/2/3 Judgment (Rate 1 low)

■Number of Fastening Steps ■Fastening Method (Torque Method) ■Reverse Flag

・The displayed content of the following D-Nos. are not stored in the fastening
result data of the controller.
D-No. 12 “Fastening Method,” D-No. 13 “Number of Fastening Steps,”
Caution D-No. 14 “Self-Checking Flag,” D-No. 15 “Reverse Flag,” and
D-No. 15 “Servo Lock Flag.”

PAGE 6-10
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

●List of Contents Indicated in the Fastening Result Mode (Reject display rotates (auto) for gray items only)
COUNT
WORK DATA Unit
/D-NO
000 Peak Torque H/L Nm
001 Final Angle H/L deg
002 Rate 1 H/L Nm/deg
003 Rate 2 H/L Nm/deg
004 Rate 3 H/L Nm/deg
005 1ST Time H/L sec
006 2ND Time H/L sec
007 Cycle Time sec
008 Differential Angle H/L deg
Fastening Result
reject:REJECT(Fastening NG)
accept:ACCEPT(Fastening OK)
abn:Stop by ABNORMAL(Abnormal occurs) signal
009
stop:Stop by loss of the STOP (Emergency Stop) Signal
reset:System clear by RESET(Reset) Signal
bypass:Stop by BYPASS(Bypass) Signal
st-off:START signal loss during BUSY (while operating) signal
010 1st Reject item (The D-No. of the fastening Reject item that occurred first is displayed)
011 Rate 1/2/3 judgment H/L
012 Fastening method (trq: torque method, ang: angle method
013 Number of fastening steps
Self-Check Flag (SC)
014
ON :Check Performed OFF :Check Not Performed
Reverse Flag (RV)
015
r01~r64 ON :Reversed OFF :Not reversed
Servo lock flag (SL)
016 Nm
ON: servo lock performed OFF: servo lock not performed
017 1st Peak Torque tq Nm
018 2nd Peak Torque tq Nm
019 SNUG Torque Judgment tq H
020 Final Torque (Offset Torque) tq H/L Nm
021 Rate 1 Incremental Torque Nm
022 Rate 1 Incremental Angle deg
023 Rate 2 Incremental Torque Nm
024 Rate 2 Incremental Angle deg
025 Rate 3 Incremental Torque Nm
026 Rate 3 Incremental Angle deg
027 Peak Current during fastening H/L (Current High/Low Limit Warning Display) A
028 Rundown Revolutions H/L Rev.
029 Load Factor %
030 Current (Amp) Value at the time when fastening is completed A
031 “—“ is always displayed
032 Axis cycle count (×1 million) * “--" if less than 1 million cycles
033 Axis cycle count (×1)
034 Tool cycle count (×1 million) * “--" if less than 1 million cycles
035 Tool cycle count (×1)
ACCEPT COUNT *0 to cycle count (0 to 99)
36 This DATA is always [c##] for COUNT/D-No. 00.
37 Peak Torque (Upper Display) Final Angle (Lower Display)

PAGE 6-11
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-2-4 Parameter Setting Mode

The following data is displayed in Fastening Parameter Display Mode. In the parameter setting
mode, “P.” is indicated at the leftmost digit of the PAR No. display and the parameter No. (01 to 32) is
indicated by the 10s and 1s digits.
The D-No. Display can be changed by pressing [▲], [▼] pushbuttons and the content of that data
No. is displayed. By pressing the [▲] or [▼] push-button, the “D-NO” can be changed ±1. The
numbers can be advanced 10 at a time by holding the [▲] or [▼] push-button longer.
Please refer to the “Parameter List” regarding parameter setting value details.

“WORK” “COUNT/D-No.” “DATA”

0 0 0 Fastening Method
P0 1

0 0 1 Fastening Steps
P6 4
Fastening Option
0 0 2

[▲] or [▼] button


(skip 10 at a time while holding down)


Unused
5 9 9

PAGE 6-12
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-2-5 System Parameter Display Mode

The following data is displayed in System Parameter Display Mode. “SYS” is indicated in the PAR No.
display area. By pressing the [▲] or [▼] push-button, the “D-NO” can be changed ±1. The numbers
can be advanced 10 at a time by holding the [▲] or [▼] push-button longer.
Refer to “Parameter List” regarding the details about parameters.

“WORK” “COUNT/D-No.” “DATA”

0 0 0 Torque Unit

Software Version
0 0 1
SYS
Amplifier Version
0 0 2

5 0 4 Touch Panel
Number of Retries
[▲] or [▼] button
(skip 10 at a time while holding down)

PAGE 6-13
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-2-6 Status Display Mode

In the Staus Display Mode (run mode), the currently selected work (parameter) No. (01 ~ 64) is
indicated in the WORK Display. The Spindle No. of the controller is indicated by the 10s and 1s
digits of the COUNT/D-No. Display.
■Ordinary View

When the state of the system is changed due to an Abnormal occurrence or the STOP signal set to
“OFF,” etc., transition to the status display is performed automatically and the contents indicated in
the respective display.

■When an error occurs (ABNORMAL signal “ON”)

Abnormal Error Code Sub code indication

■When the BYPASS signal is turned “ON” ■When the RESET button is turned “ON”

ProG “PrOG”

“rES”

■When the STOP signal is turned “OFF” ■When the CAL button is turned “ON”

“StoP”

“CAL”

PAGE 6-14
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

During fastening operation, the operation speed and the fastening step are indicated in the WORK
display, as well as the parameter No. (01~ 64) that is currently in operation. The mode cannot be
changed in the display during fastening operation.
Transition to the fastening result mode is performed automatically after the fastening ends.
The following are indication examples during a fastening operation of parameter No. 1.
■During initial speed ■During freerun speed ■During 1st speed

■During 2nd speed ■During 3rd speed

*The display content of the upper section of the indicator is maintained during reverse operation.
■During reverse 1 speed ■During reverse 2 speed ■During reverse 3 speed

“WORK”

P01 Work No. 01

P02 Work No. 02

P03 Work No. 03


64

The “WORK” P No. is changed with


P64 Work No. 64 the [▲] or [▼] button.

*The operation cannot be performed if the controller System Parameter [034] is setup to select the work
selection by external PLC (instead of the Front Panel).

PAGE 6-15
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-3 Parameter Program Mode


NOTE: Setting up parameters is performed easier using the HFC3000 Software – this method is
provided in the case software is not available

The parameter settings can only be changed/programmed when in the BYPASS / PROGRAM mode.
The Data No. and parameter setting of each parameter No. is displayed.
Display while in Parameter Program Mode)

DATA Display COUNT/D-No. Display

WORK Display

●DATA Display
The actual set value is displayed here.
●WORK Display
The fastening parameter No. (P.01-P.64) is displayed here.
●COUNT/D-No. Display
The parameter data No. is displayed here

6-3-1 Changing Modes in the PROGRAM Mode


or SET

Parameter Parameter Edit


Status Display
Selection Mode Mode

SET or RESET
ProG

●Status Display
The current state of the controller is indicated in this mode.
Display in this mode is performed immediately after changing from the RUN mode to the PROGRAM
mode. (by pushing the “PRG” Key)
Changing to the set value selection mode is performed by the [◄] and [►] buttons.
In the “Parameter Program Mode” and the “System Setting Mode,” the mode is changed directly to
the set value selection mode.
●Parameter Selection Mode
A parameter can be selected in this mode.
The [◄] and [►] buttons are used to change the position of the cursor.
The [▲] and [▼] buttons are used to change the indicated parameter number.
●Parameter Editing Mode
A parameter is programmed in this mode.
The value is edited using the [▲] and [▼] buttons and saved with the “SET” button.
When the “RESET” button is pressed, the setting (in the process of being changed) is discarded and
the original setting returns (before attempting to change it).

PAGE 6-16
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-3-2 Parameter Selection Mode

Immediately after “Parameter Selection Mode” is established, the cursor (blinking number) is
displayed on the PAR No. Display when the [◄] push-button is pressed. When the [►]
push-button is pressed, the cursor (blinking number) is displayed on the D-No. Display.
The display set value of the cursor (blinking character) can be changed by ±1 using the [▲] or [▼]
push-button. The numbers can be advanced 10 at a time by holding the [▲] or [▼] push-button
longer.
“Parameter Edit Mode” can be entered by pressing the [◎ SET] push-button.

SET SET

SET
Parameter Editing Mode

PAGE 6-17
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

In the Parameter selection mode, “SYS.” is displayed in the WORK Display in the case of a SYSTEM
parameter and the parameter No. (P.01 to P.64) is indicated in the case of a FASTENING parameter.
The WORK Display is changed by pressing the [►] or [◄] button and the content of the data No. is
indicated in the upper display section accordingly.
When the [▲] button is pressed the value in the WORK Display is increased by 1.
When the [▼] button is pressed the value in the WORK Display is decreased by 1.
The current cursor (blinking) position can be moved by pressing the [►] or [◄] button and, by holding
down the [▲] or [▼] button, the value in the WORK Display can skip by 5 at a time (or the value in the
WORK Display can be skipped by 10 at a time).
Please refer to the “List of Parameters” regarding the detail of the setting values.
“WORK” “COUNT/D-No.” “DATA”

0 0 0 Torque controller

0 0 1 Software Version

SYS
0 0 2 Amplifier Version

5 0 4 Touch Panel
Number of Retries

Fastening Method
0 0 0
P 0 1

0 0 1 Fastening Steps
P 6 4

Fastening Option
0 0 2

[▲] or [▼] button


WORK Display: skip 5 at a time while holding down

5 9 9 Unused COUNT/D-No. Display: skip 10 at a time while


holding down

PAGE 6-18
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-3-3 Parameter Editing Mode

Immediately after changing to the “Parameter Editing Mode,” the cursor (flashing number) is
displayed in the upper section of the display. When the [▲] or [▼] button is pressed, the numerical
value at the cursor position changes by ±1.
When the [◄] or [►] button is pressed, the digit in the cursor position changes by ±1.

SET
SET

SET Change of
Fastening
Parameter

When the set value is changed and the [SET] button is pressed, the set value is saved in memory.
If the [RESET] button is pressed in the “Parameter Editing Mode,” the display is changed back to the
parameter selection mode without changing the set value.
When the changed set value is outside the allowable setting range (of that particular parameter), the
following error is indicated and the data will revert back to the data before attempting to edit it.

• The changed parameter becomes effective when the PROGRAM mode changes back
to the RUN mode, or when the BYPASS signal changes from ON to OFF.
Caution Turning the power OFF in the PROGRAM mode during the change, returns to the
parameters back to the original before the change.

PAGE 6-19
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

● System Parameter Setting Method


Parameter displayed with [SYS] in the PAR No. display is a System Parameter.
Press the [SET] push-button after editing the parameter. Once the SET push-button has been
pressed the [DATA] display will show “CHAnGE”and “no” will appear on the “D-NO” display.
“yES” or “no” can be selected by pressing the [▲] and [▼] buttons. If “yES” is selected, confirm the
entered data by pressing the [SET] button. The [SET] and [MODE] buttons will have no effect when
“no” appears.

SET

▲ or ▼ Within 2 seconds

SET System
Parameter
Within 2 seconds
Change

*If neither YES or NO is not selected within 2 seconds, the new data will be ignored and the system
will exit the “Data Edit Mode”.

・The changed value will be saved into the internal memory at the moment the
BYPASS / PROGRAM mode is changed from BYPASS to RUN or when the BYPASS
signal turns from ON to OFF.
・If the power is turned off when changing the set value in BYPASS mode, the changed
value will be canceled and will be set back to the original value.
・Some of the system parameters (PAR No.000) are not changed, until the control
power is rebooted. (D-No.003 Function Version, D-No.011~016 TCP/IP Setting etc.)
・When the Controller Tool No. (PAR No. “SYS,” D-No. “200”) is changed, the fastening
parameter set values are subject to initialization and automatic correction due to the
tool size being changed.
・ The calibration torque, Rate 1 - 3 high and low limits, Full Scale current, High current
limit, and the Current limit are subject to re-initialization (Power off/on).
・ If the Torque, Speed, or Current low limit set value falls outside the high or low limit
value of the tool for which the set value was changed, this set value is subject to
automatic correction.

PAGE 6-20
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-4 Parameter Copy / Erasing the Fastening Result History / Formatting of the CF Card

NOTE: Copying parameters is performed easier using the HFC3000 Software – this is provided in the
case software is not available
When multiple parameter sets need to be changed, one parameter can be copied to another parameter
while in the parameter edit mode.
Use the following procedure to copy parameters;
1. Operate the arrow pushbuttons to display “Copy,” with “SYS” indicated in the PAR No. display and
“022” indicated in the D-No. display.
2. Press and hold the PROG button of the Controller until the “022” blinks. Then press the [SET]
pushbutton and the COPY source/destination parameter numbers will appear in the upper
display.
3. Select the copy source parameter No. in the first 2 digits of the upper stage of the display (DATA).
4. Select the copy destination parameter No. in the last 2 digits of the upper stage of the display
(DATA).
5. Press the [SET] pushbutton, press the [▲] or [▼] pushbuttons to change the indication from
“Copy NO” to “Copy YES” within 2 seconds, and then press the [SET] pushbutton again within 2
seconds.
6. Copying one parameter to another parameter is complete.
7. Press and hold the PROG button of the Controller until the "022" stops blink.

Copy Source Copy Destination


[SET] [▲] or [▼] [SET]

Copy a parameter
to a parameter

Canceled if operation is not performed within 2 seconds.


●Batch Copying
Ex.:Copy parameter 1 to parameter 2~32
1. Operate the arrow pushbuttons to make “Copy,” with “SYS” indicated in the PAR No. display and
“022” indicated in the D-No. display.
2. Press and hold the PROG button of the Controller until the “022” blinks. Then press the [SET]
pushbutton and the COPY source/destination parameter numbers will appear in the upper
display.
3. Select the copy source parameter No. in the first 2 digits of the upper area of the display (DATA).
4. Select “99” in the last 2 digits of the upper area of the display (DATA) and then press the [SET]
pushbutton.
5. Press the [▲] or [▼] pushbuttons to change the indication from “Copy NO” to “Copy YES” within 2
seconds, and then press the [SET] pushbutton within 2 seconds.
6. Parameter 1 will be copied to parameter 2~32.
7. Press and hold the PROG button of the Controller until the "022" stops blinking.
Copy Source “99”
[SET] [▲] or [▼] [SET]

Parameter
Batch Copy

Canceled if operation is not performed within 2 seconds.

PAGE 6-21
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

●Erasing Fastening Data History


All of the fastening data results history saved in the controller can be erased with similar procedures.

・Once the fastening results history is erased, the data cannot be


retrieved. Be careful when erasing the data.

●Fastening Result Record Erasing Operation Procedure


1. Operate the arrow pushbuttons to display “Erase” with “SYS” indicated in the PAR No. display and
“021” indicated in the D-No. display.
2. Press and hold the PROG button of the Controller until the "021" blinks.
3. Press the [▲] or [▼] pushbutton to select “Single” as the type of result history to be erased and
then press the [SET] pushbutton.
4. Press the [▲] or [▼] pushbutton to change the indication from “Erase NO” to “Erase YES” within 2
seconds, and then press the [SET] pushbutton within 2 seconds.
5. When the data is being erased, “ErASE” in the DATA Display flashes for a few seconds and the
flashing stops when the erasure is completed.

[SET] [▲] or [▼] [SET]

SinGLE Erasing the


Fastening
Result History

Canceled if not operated for 2 seconds.

●CF Card Formatting Operation


1. Operate the arrow pushbuttons to display “Erase” with “SYS” indicated in the PAR No. display and
“021” indicated in the D-No. display.
2. Press and hold the PROG button of the Controller until the "021" blinks.
3. Press the [▲] or [▼] button to select “CF” and then press “SET.”
4. Press the [▲] or [▼] pushbutton to change the indication from “Erase NO” to “Erase YES” within 2
seconds, and then press the [SET] pushbutton within 2 seconds.
5. When the formatting of the CF card is started, “ForMAT” in the DATA Display flashes for a few
seconds.
[SET] [▲] or [▼] [SET]

CF Formatting
of CF Card

Canceled if not operated for 2 seconds.

6. If formatting succeeds, “SuccES” is indicated in the DATA Display for 3 seconds (CF ACCESS
lights up in green).
7. If formatting fails, “FAILEd” is indicated in the DATA Display for 3 seconds (CF ACCESS lights up
in red).

PAGE 6-22
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-5 Fastening Reject (NG) Result Indications

When a fastening reject (NG) occurs, in addition to the NG lamp indication, the item that rejects during the
fastening is indicated in the numerical value portion of the display.
In the case of fastening to standard torque, judgments are made in the order: rate high/low limits, differential
angle high/low limits, fastening time high/low limits, angle high/low limits, peak torque high/low limits, and final
torque high/low limits, and the item with which the 1st reject was detected is indicated.

(The below function to display the reject item may not be available to older versions of the firmware)

Example of fastening
display in the case of The fastening peak torque value is
an OK judgment indicated.

Fastening result indication Fastening reject item display

Example of Peak Torque


High Limit reject judgment
The indication
alternates every 1
second. The judgment, “H,” is displayed first followed by
the reject item

Fastening result
display mode No. NG content symbol

Parameter No. Judgment result


“r” as the prefix indicates the
result display mode.

Reject content symbols


・Ptrq Peak torque ・Ftrq Final torque
・Strq Snug torque ・StC Starting torque inhibit
・AnGLFinal angle ・dIFF Differetntial angle
・1Str Rate 1 ・2ndr Rate 2
・3rdr Rate 3
・1Stt 1st time ・2ndt 2nd time
・turn Rundown revolutions
・St-off Lever Off ・Gyro Gyro Stop

If the fastening result display item is peak torque and the fastening reject item is an angle high limit
reject, the display will be as follows.
Fastening result display Fastening reject item display

Example of
low limit peak
torque NG The display
judgment alternates every
1 second. The judgment, “H,” is indicated first
followed by the reject item
Even if a reset, bypass, reverse, or CAL operation is performed, the display is not canceled (as long as the
First-Reject result No. exists). When the next fastening is started, the result display is reset and any alternating
indication ends.

PAGE 6-23
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-5-1 Example of Fastening Reject item Display

1. Torque High Limit Judgment

Peak Torque High limit Reject

Cause: Seizing / locking of threads, excessive speed

Torque Inhibit High limit Reject

Cause: Workpiece problem, Torque required during thread cutting is too


high

2. Angle High Limit Judgment

Angle High limit Reject

Cause: Elongation of screw during final fastening, threads starting to strip,


wrong gasket material

3. Rate High/Low Limit Judgment

Rate1 Low limit Reject

Cause: Thread problem – large rotation with little torque rise,


thread/fastener yielding

Rate1 High limit Reject

Cause: Thread Problem – very little rotation with a large torque rise:
Crossthread, trying to fasten on a bolt already torqued, fastener being
torqued into blind hole (fastener hits bottom)

Rate2 Low limit Reject

Cause: Fastener or thread is yielding (stretching)

Rate2 High limit Reject

Cause: Trying to fasten on a pre-torqued bolt, tapped


threads ended in hole – cutting threads, blind hole

Rate3 Low limit Reject

Cause: Fastener or thread is yielding (stretching)

Rate3 High limit Reject

Cause: Trying to fasten on a pre-torqued bolt,


Seized bolt

PAGE 6-24
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

4. Fastening Time High Limit Judgment

1ST Time High limit Reject

Cause: Non-engagement / broken socket, no fastener present

2ND Time High limit Reject

Cause: Fastener is yielding, fastener is cutting


threads, socket disengaged

5. Rundown Revolutions High Limit Judgment

Rundown Revolutions High Limit Reject

Cause: Bolt length wrong, socket disengaged

6. Others

Start trigger Off Reject

Cause: Start Trigger was released before the end


of fastening

Gyro Stop Reject

Cause: Gyro sensor swing detection detected a


safety Stop

PAGE 6-25
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-5-2. Reject Judgment / Limits


Judgments by the high and low limit values of torque, angle, time, and rundown revolutions are performed
during the fastening operation or after the end of fastening. The REJECT judgment is made if a fastening
result falls outside the high or low limit range.
* High and Low Limit Standard Values for Output Judgment
The high and low limit values of the HFC3000 System are as follows.
・High limit standard value (REJECT): A value exceeding the high limit standard value
・High limit standard value (ACCEPT): A value that is no more than the high limit standard value
・Low limit standard value (REJECT): A value less than the low limit standard value
・Low limit standard value (ACCEPT): A value that is no less than the low limit standard value
REJECT < Low Limit Standard Value ≤ ACCEPT ≤ High Limit Standard Value < REJECT

Caution: The fastening judgment is not performed (regardless of the high and low limit
set values) when the setting of the fastening parameters WORK 1-64 D-No. 003 “Judge
Item 1” and D-No. 004 “Judge Item 2” are set to ‘0’.

102: Peak Torque High Limit

119: Final Torque High Limit

101: Peak Torque Low Limit


118: Final Torque Low Limit

108: Snug Torque High Limit

107: Snug Torque

111: Torque Inhibit Limit

200: Final Angle Low Limit

205: Torque Inhibit Angle 201: Final Angle High Limit

PAGE 6-26
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

The following judgments cannot be disabled.


Caution
・Peak Torque ・Final Angle ・Time

●Torque Check [N•m]


•Peak Torque
The high and low Peak Torque limit values during fastening on are set. Fastening operation is ended if the
peak torque high limit value is exceeded during fastening operation. (Peak Torque is the control point in
TORQUE CONTROL)

•Final Torque
The high and low Final Torque limit values of the fastening torque at the point at which the standard angle is
attained are set. (Final Torque is the final torque recorded at the point Standard Angle is attained in
ANGLE CONTROL)

•Snug Torque
The high limit value of Snug torque is detected when Snug Torque Detection is set.

•Torque Inhibit
The Torque Inhibit high limit value after the start of the fastening operation is set. This can be used for
fastening in cases where the starting torque is higher than your targeting torque. The fastening operation
is ended when, during operation within D-No. 205 [Torque Inhibit Angle], the start torque inhibit high limit
value is exceeded.

Additionally, from the start of fastening to the point at which D-No. 205 [Torque Inhibit Angle] is attained,
torque-related set values besides the starting torque inhibit high limit are ignored.
Torque
111 Torque Inhibit 205 Torque Inhibit Angle
Limit

103 Standard Torque


109 2nd Torque
105 1st Torque
107 Snug Torque

1st Time 2nd Time Angle (Time)

•When the Torque Inhibit check is enabled, the following set values are ignored within the Torque
Inhibit Angle from the start of fastening.
D-No. 103: Standard Torque, D-No. 104: Ramp Down Start Torque, D-No. 105: 1st Torque, D-No.
107: Snug Torque, D-No. 109: 2nd Torque, D-No. 112: Rate 1 Start Torque, D-No. 113: Rate 1
End Torque, D-No. 114: Rate 2 Start Torque, D-No. 115: Rate 2 End Torque, D-No. 116: Rate 3
Start Torque, and D-No. 117: Rate 3 End Torque.

PAGE 6-27
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

●Angle Check [deg]


•Final Angle
The Angle high and low limit values from the point of Snug Torque to the end of fastening are set.
Fastening operation is ended if the angle high limit value is exceeded during the fastening operation.

●Timeout Check [sec]


•1st Time
The 1ST Time high and low limit values from the start of fastening to 1st torque or the 1st angle are set.

•2nd Time
The 2nd Time high and low limit values from 1st torque or the 1st angle to the end of fastening are set.
In regards to the time low limit, if the fastening operation reaches its target in a time less than the time set in
the low limit, a low limit reject will occur. If the 1st and 2nd time high limit is exceeded during the fastening
operation, the operation is stopped and a High Limit reject will occur.
When 2 or 3 steps is selected as the number of fastening steps, the delay times between fastening steps
are not counted as part of 1st time and 2nd time. Additionally, the self-check function executed before the
start of fastening operation is not counted as any cycle time.
●Rundown Revolutions Check [rev.]
•Rundown revolutions
The high and low limit values of the rundown revolutions from the fastening start point to the fastening end
point are set.

PAGE 6-28
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

●Rate Check
Three torque rate areas capable of judging the rise of torque vs. angle (slope) can be used to monitor the
fastening operation.
A rate start torque (angle) and a rate end torque (angle) set the boundaries of each area and the torque
slope (slope of the torque vs. angle) between the two points is calculated to make the judgment once the
end point is reached. (Example: 25N•m÷100deg=0.25N•m/deg).
The fastening operation is ended when the measurement value of each rate falls outside the the high and
low limit ranges.
The start torque (angle) and end torque (angle) of the respective rates can be set freely without any relation
to the order of the rates and the set values of the other rates.

[To Customers Using the older FUSION Handheld Nutrunner Systems]


There are parameter D-Nos. that are changed in name and function.
Please reference the corresponding table on the following page for correct
parameter setup

117: Rate 3
305: Rate 3 High Limit
End Torque

116: Rate 3 304: Rate 3 Low Limit


Start Torque

115: Rate 2
End Torque
114: Rate 2 303: Rate 2 High Limit
Start Torque 302: Rate 2 Low Limit

113: Rate 1 301: Rate 1 High Limit


End Torque
300: Rate 1 Low
112: Rate 1 Limit
Start Torque

209: Rate 1 End Angle 211: Rate 2 End Angle 213: Rate 3 End Angle
208: Rate 1 Start Angle 212: Rate 2 Start Angle 212: Rate 3 Start Angle

207: Differential - Angle 206: Differential + Angle

PAGE 6-29
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

•If the rate start torque (angle) cannot be detected during fastening operation, the rate judgment
will not be performed.
•Under the following conditions, the torque (angle) at the end of fastening is judged as the rate
end torque (angle).
•If the set values are set so that rate start torque (angle) > rate end torque (angle).
Caution
•If the rate end torque (angle) cannot be detected during the fastening operation.
. When the increase in angle from the measurement start point to the end point is “0” deg, the
operation varies depending on the firmware version.
·Before ver1.304: The rate calculation becomes "0" and rate is not judged
·Ver1.305 or later: The rate calculation becomes the maximum and the rate judgment is rate
high NG

●FUSION/HFC3000 Fastening Parameter (Rate) Correspondence Table

FUSION HFC3000
Function
Fastening Parameter Fastening Parameter

The torque value sets the start point of


17 Threshold Torque 112 Rate 1 Start Torque
measurement of torque rate 1.

15 1st Torque The torque value sets the end point of


113 Rate 1 End Torque
(1st Rate End Torque) measurement of torque rate 1.

The torque value sets the start point of


1E 2nd Rate Start Torque 114 Rate 2 Start Torque
measurement of torque rate 2.

The torque value sets the end point of


115 Rate 2 End Torque
18 CROS Torque measurement of torque rate 2.
(2nd Rate End Torque • 3rd
Rate End Torque) The torque value sets the start point of
116 Rate 3 Start Torque
measurement of torque rate 3.

13 Standard Torque The torque value sets the end point of


117 Rate 3 End Torque
(3rd Rate End Torque) measurement of torque rate 3.

The angle value sets the start point of


208 Rate 1 Start Angle
measurement of torque rate 1.

23 1st Angle The angle value sets the end point of


209 Rate 1 End Angle
(1st Rate End Angle) measurement of torque rate 1.

The angle value sets the start point of


26 2nd Rate Start Angle 210 Rate 2 Start Angle
measurement of torque rate 2.

The angle value sets the end point of


211 Rate 2 End Angle
24 CROS Angle measurement of torque rate 2.
(2nd Rate End Angle • 3rd Rate
Start Angle)

The angle value sets the start point of


212 Rate 3 Start Angle
measurement of torque rate 3.
27 3rd Rate Start Angle

22 Standard Angle The angle value sets the end point of


213 Rate 3 End Angle
(3rd Rate End Angle) measurement of torque rate 3.

PAGE 6-30
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

●Differential Angle Check


After the end of fastening, the differential angle, which is the difference between the seating point (angle) of
the final torque and the seating point (angle) calculated from rate 2, is measured and judged.
The seating point (angle) calculated from rate 2 is based on the rate 2 start torque (angle) and the rate 2
end torque (angle). (projects the same rate back to zero to determine the seat point)
The differential angle is judged whether or not the calculated differential angle is within ranges based on
the calculated seating point (angle).
•The value of the Differential angle of the fastening curve data and the value of the
differential angle of the fastening result contain a measurement error of a maximum of
Caution
5deg (±2.5deg).

Torque 202 Standard Angle

103 Standard
Torque

115 Rate 2
End Torque
303 Rate 2
High Limit
302 Rate 2
114 Rate 2 Low Limit
Start Torque

203 1st Angle


105 1st Torque

107 Snug Torque

Angle

Differential Angle
207 Differential (Fastening Result)
-Angle 206 Differential +Angle
Seating point calculated from the Rate 2

•If rate 2 start torque cannot be detected during the fastening operation, the differential angle
check will not be performed.
•Under the following conditions, the torque at the end of fastening is judged as the rate 2 end
torque.
•If the set values are set so Rate 2 start torque > Rate 2 end torque.
•If Rate 2 end torque cannot be detected during the fastening operation.

PAGE 6-31
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

● Break away Torque Check


The Break away Torque value during reverse rotation is judged .
When D-No. 110 [Reverse Torque High Limit] is exceeded, the fastening operation is
ended and an abnormal is output. (A09-08 “Reverse Torque Error”) The detection high
limit depends on the firmware version installed; (as shown in the table below)
Reverse rotation operation
Interrupt Operation
Controller Break away Fastening During Fastening:
PLC I/O Reversing
Software Torque Option: “Reverse Between
input signal switch
Version Check “Reverse Before 1-2 Steps” and
“REVERSE” operation
Fastening” “Reverse Between
2-3 Steps”

less than Disable (0) Without limit


V1.002 Enable (1) D-No. 110 [Reverse Torque High Limit] Without limit
D-No. 110
V1.002~ Disable (0) Without limit
[Reverse Torque High Limit]
V1.204
Enable (1) D-No. 110 [Reverse Torque High Limit]
D-No. 110
Disable (0) 1.3 times D-No.100 [Calibration torque]
V1.205 or later [Reverse Torque High Limit]
Enable (1) D-No. 110 [Reverse Torque High Limit]

Torque

Reverse stop A.09-08 is generated


Angle

D-No.110 [Reverse Torque High Limit]


or
1.3 times of D-No.100 [Calibration torque]

・ D-No. 110 [Reverse Torque High Limit] The default setting is 5Nm. In reverse operation, the
tool will automatically stop at the [Reverse Torque High Limit] for operator safety. (This limit
can be changed by the user)

PAGE 6-32
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

● Current Value Warnings


Motor current draw during fastening is monitotred and can be used to monitor the motor current
draw over time (for PM evaluation). After the end of the fastening operation, the peak current
value is judged to be within the high and low limit ranges. If the peak current value during
operation falls below the low current limit or exceeds the high current limit, (even though the
controller may output an ACCEPT for the fastening), the PLC output signals “Multi: Current Limit
Warning,” “Axis: Current Limit Warning,” “Axis: Current Low Warning,” or “Axis: Current High
Warning” is turned “ON.”
・The current value warning judgment cannot be disabled.
・The full scale current is based on the motor used and is set automatically for the controller
Caution smodel used. Do not change this value if there is no special reason to do so.
·The max current value differs depending on the motor type of the tool used.
(M50 : 10 A, M 80 : 16 A, M 120 : 21 A)

Additionally, the Fastening Current Limit value (D-No.523) limits the maximum value of the current
during the fastening operation. If a value lower than the full scale current is set, the motor current
during the fastening process will not exceed the value set as this current limit. The current limit value is
used to protect the motor during the execution of torque recovery (if used) (which is an after-fastening
operation). When the current limit is exceeded, the fastening is stopped and the abnormal state signal
A05-01 “Servo Reply Error” is output.

522: High Current Warning :100%

523: Fastening Current Limit :100%

521: Low Current Warning : 0%

520: No Load Current Limit:10%

PAGE 6-33
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-5-3 Fastening Speed and Time


The AFC3000 System is user-programmable for operations involving multiple speed settings. The use of
multiple speeds during the fastening process aids in socket engagement, achieving cycle time and control
ling the applied torque during all stages. Speed functions work the same for Torque Control and Angle C
ontrol using any of the previously stated standard Judge functions. Special conditions that affect these op
erations will be identified in the appropriate section.
1. The system will fasten to the 1ST TORQUE/ANGLE value during the specified 1st TIME limits. The
following fastening operations occur during 1st time:
a) The system starts off running at INITIAL SPEED for the period specified by INITIAL TIME. The
initial time should be set to mitigate shock occurred at the fastening start time or to engage a bolt
and a socket.
b) Upon completion of INITIAL TIME the system switches to FREERUN SPEED for the period
specified by FREERUN REVOLUTIONS. The number of revolutions required to complete
INITIAL TIME will be deducted from the number of revolutions ran at FREERUN SPEED.
c) Once RAMP DOWN START TORQUE is detected or FREERUN REVOLUTIONS expires, the
system will switch from FREERUN SPEED to 1st SPEED and continue to fasten until 1st
TORQUE/ANGLE is attained or the 1ST TIME HIGH LIMIT is reached. 1st SPEED is switched
right before the fastener is seated and is intended to provide adequate speed to seat the fastener
without getting a load to the tool.

500: Freerun Revolutions


503: Rundown Revolution Low Limit
504: Rundown Revolution High Limit

401: Freerun Speed 104: Rampdown Start Torque


1-c
1-a 1-b
402: 1st Speed
403: 2nd Speed
404: 3rd Speed
400: Initial Speed

310: Initial Time 315: Torque


Recovery Time

1st Time 2nd Time

PAGE 6-34
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

2. Upon reaching 1ST Torque/Angle, 1st Time ends and 2ND Time begins. 1ST Torque/Angle is the shift point
from 1st Speed to 2nd Speed.
3. For a 2 step fastening, the system will fasten to Standard Torque/Angle using 2nd Speed during the
specified 2nd Time limits. Standard Torque/Angle must be reached within the 2nd Time Low/High Limits or
a reject will occur. The fastening result will output as REJECT (NG). (The time judgment cannot be
disabled.)
4. If the 2nd Torque/Angle is detected before the Standard Torque/Angle, the speed is switched from 2nd
Speed to 3rd Speed.
For a 3 step fastening, the system will fasten to Standard Torque/Angle using 3rd Torque Speed during the
specified 2nd Time Limits. Standard Torque/Angle must be reached within the 2nd Time Low/High Limits or
a reject will occur. The fastening result will output as REJECT (NG). (The time judgment cannot be
disabled.)

・ If D-No. 109 [2nd Torque] is set to 95 ~ 100% of D-No. 103 [Standard Torque], the fastening speed
is automatically set to 3rpm after the detection of the 2nd torque.
・ Use of this function is not recommended for fastening a soft joint. The abnormal state signal
Caution
A.08-10 “Overload Error” may be generated.

500: Freerun Revolutions


503: Rundown Revolution Low Limit
504: Rundown Revolution High Limit

401: Freerun Speed


2
3
402: 1st Speed 4
403: 2nd Speed
404: 3rd Speed
400: Initial Speed

315: Torque
310: Initial Time
Recovery Time

1st Time 2nd Time

PAGE 6-35
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-5-4 Auxiliary Attachments - Tubenut Head Setup


Tubenut heads are used for applications that require a socket to be inserted around a tube to fasten an
accompanying tubenut. They require a special function to re-align the “U” shaped socket back to its
“open” position in order to remove the nutrunner from the tube after fastening. When using an optional
Tubenut head, special programming options MUST be set-up to enable the Tubenut socket automatic
return function along with various other considerations.

Tubenut head applications inherently present safety concerns especially in the area of the open “U”
shaped socket. The opening of the “U” shaped socket presents a PINCH POINT while rotating.

WARNING: KEEP ALL BODY PARTS AWAY FROM THE TUBENUT HEAD SOCKET
OPENING DURING OPERATION OR PERSONAL INJURY MAY RESULT!

PLEASE CONSULT YOUR PLANT SAFETY PERSONNEL BEFORE USING THIS


HEAD!

All safety precautions MUST be followed to ensure safe operation and operator
safety!

PAGE 6-36
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

Recommended Parameter Set-up for Tubenut Head


The following parameters are recommended for setting up the Tubenut head function.

1. Gear Head Option Setup [SYS], [D-No]-036 (Default Setting “0”)


**(Can only be set using the front display keypad)
Change for use with Tubenut head (Set as below)
0: Standard Head
1: Tubenut Head (Bottom socket - CW fastening)
2: Tubenut Head (Top Socket - CCW fastening)

2. External Gear Ratio [SYS], [D-No]-04 (Can be changed using software)


Default is “1.000”. If the gear ratio is other than 1:1, then the gear ratio must be adjusted
here or torque/angle readings will not be correct when fastening.
(ex. If gear ratio is 1:1.132, then “1.132” should be entered here)

WARNING: Setup proper CW / CCW rotation PRIOR to running the tool with the Tubenut
head attached or Tubenut Head damage may occur! (The Tubenut head stop detail
which re-aligns the “open” slot in the socket gear may be broken if too much force is
applied)

3. Calibration Torque [PAR]-01(thru-64), [D-No]-100


This value is used to adjust the calibration of the tool / tubenut gearing. Typically tubenut
heads will have a 20 – 35% loss of torque through the gearing and minor adjustments can
be made using this value. Large torque losses (that cannot be adjusted in the range of
this setting) must be adjusted internally in the Torque transducer internal settings (tool ID)
This value changes with tool size and capacity.

4. Torque Inhibit Limit [PAR]-01(thru-64), [D-No]-111


When using the Tubenut function, the Torque Inhibit Limit parameter sets the MAX.
amount of torque that can be sensed during the Torque Inhibit Revolution setting. This is
used to set the max. torque to be sensed during the start of rotation of the socket or until
the socket “U” opening moves to a closed position. This will protect from damage
anything being inserted into the path of the socket as it rotates in the OPEN space.
If this torque value is exceeded during the Torque Inhibit Revolution (Work – 01 (thru-16)
D-No-61), a REJECT will result. This cannot be set too low or nuisance REJECTS will
occur during normal motor start-up.
Recommended setting: .75 – 1.5Nm
NOTE: This setting will vary by tool size and Tubenut head configuration.

WARNING! – Do not set this ABOVE the recommended setting or personnel injury
may result!

5. Torque Inhibit Angle [PAR]-01(thru-64), [D-No]-205


Set Torque Inhibit angle so that the torque can be checked during motor start-up (Just
enough angle revolution for the socket to close the “U” opening) Recommended setting:
15 - 30degrees

6. Initial Time [PAR]-01(thru-64), [D-No]-310


Set Initial Time so that revolution time/speed is slow during motor start-up (the time that
the socket is rotating in the socket “U” opening)
Recommended setting: .4sec

7. Initial Speed [PAR]-01(thru-64), [D-No]-400


Set Initial Speed for slow rotation while socket is rotating through the “U” opening.
Recommended setting: 30 - 60rpm max.

8. Reverse 1 Speed [PAR]-01(thru-64), [D-No]-405


Reverse speed is used to re-align the socket after a fastening.
Recommended setting: 40 - 60 rpm max.

PAGE 6-37
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

Tubenut Head Operation


When using a Tubenut head, a special function is required to re-align the socket after normal fastening
operations and allow the socket to be placed onto the nut to be fastened. The start trigger must be held
“ON” for the complete fastening of the part. If the trigger is released during the fastening cycle, the
fastening will stop. The fastening can be re-started by simply squeezing the trigger again. Use the
procedures below to re-align the Tubenut socket.

First Time Power-Up / Socket Re-alignment


If the Tubenut socket is not aligned use the following procedure to re-align the open socket.
▪ Select / Press the “Reverse” tool function (Tool RED / GREEN LED’S will flash)
▪ Press the start trigger
▪ Hold the start trigger until the socket is re-aligned and the tool shuts off (tool automatically
shuts off)
NOTE: If the socket is turning in the wrong direction to re-align the head (Re-alignment must turn CCW for
proper operation), the Gear Head Selection is wrong ([SYS], [D-No]-036).

Return to Home Position after Fastening


After fastening a part, the tubenut socket must be re-aligned in order to remove it from the part. Use the
procedure above to re-align the socket if removal is desired.
Use this procedure to re-align the socket and remove the head from the part after a complete fastening.
▪ Hold down start trigger until fastening is complete
▪ While still HOLDING the start trigger after fastening is complete, lift socket off of the nut being
fastened
▪ Release start trigger and the socket will re-align automatically.
▪ If the trigger is inadvertently released before the socket is re-aligned, follow the procedure
above to re-align the socket.

PAGE 6-38
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-6 Parameter Structure


Parameter No.: SYS
System Parameters
000: Torque Unit
001: Software Version
002: Amplifier Version
003: System Indication
~ ~

504:Touch Panel
Number of Retries
Parameter No. P. 64
Parameter No. P. 63
Parameter No. P. 62

Parameter No. P. 03
Parameter No. P. 02
Parameter No. P. 01
000: Fastening Method
001: Fastening Steps
002: Fastening Option
003: Judge Item 1
004: Judge Item 2

599: Unused

PAGE 6-39
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-6-1 System Parameters


<System Parameters> Par No. Indication: SYS [Setting Change marked “O” user changable]
Setting
Item D-No. Contents Unit
change
000 Torque Unit ○
001 Software Version
002 Amplifier Version
003 System Indication
004 Spindle Adapter Gear Ratio ○
005 For Adjustment by the Manufacturer
006 For Adjustment by the Manufacturer
007 Communication Axis Indication
008 Axis Cycle Count (×1 million)
009 Axis Cycle Count (×1)
010 controller Maximum Current
011 IP Address (upper 6 digits): 192.168 ○
012 IP Address (lower 6 digits): 11.10 ○
013 Subnet Mask (upper 6 digits): 255.255 ○
controller 014 Subnet Mask (lower 6 digits): 255.0 ○
Information 1 015 Default Gateway (upper 6 digits): 192.168 ○
016 Default Gateway (lower 6 digits): 11.1 ○
017 MAC Address (upper 6 digits): 001F98
018 MAC Address (lower 6 digits): 001000
019 RTC: Year/Month/Day “130725” July 25, 2013 ○
020 RTC: Time “123456” 12:34 56 ○
021 Erase Fastening Record/Format CF Card ○
022 Parameter Copy ○
023 For Adjustment by the Manufacturer
024 For Adjustment by the Manufacturer
025 For Adjustment by the Manufacturer
026 Controller SW1 Setting state
027 Controller SW2 Setting state
028 For Adjustment by the Manufacturer
029 For Adjustment by the Manufacturer
030 Parameter Change Unlock Code ○
033 System Option 1 ○
034 System Option 2 ○
035 System Option 3 ○
036 Gear head Type ○
037 Start Switch Level ○
038 Rapid Switch level ○
039 CW / CCW Switch Level ○
040 For Adjustment by the Manufacturer
Options 041 //
042 //
043 //
044 //
045 //
046 //
047 //
048 //
049 //

PAGE 6-40
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

Setting
Item D-No. Contents Unit
change
100 Connected Tool No.
101 Connected Tool Information “015-P1”
102 Connected Tool CAL Torque Decimal Point Position
103 Connected Tool CAL Torque Nm
104 Connected Tool CAL Voltage V
105 Connected Tool ZERO Voltage V
106 Connected Tool Internal Gear Ratio (×100)
Connected
107 Connected Tool Serial No. (upper 3 digits)
Tool Settings
108 Connected Tool Serial No. (lower 4 digits)
109 Connected Tool Rotation Direction
110 Connected Tool Order No. (upper 2 digits)
111 Connected Tool Order No. (lower 5 digits)
112 Connected Tool Cycle Count (×1 million)
113 Connected Tool Cycle Count (×1)
114 Connected Tool Maximum Current A
200 controller Setting Tool No. ○
201 controller Setup Tool Information “015M50”
202 Parameter Setting File Version
203 Sequence Setting File Version
204 PLC Output Layout Setting File Version
Controller 205 Fieldbus Setting File Version
Information 2 206 Fieldbus Message Setting File Version
207 RS232C Input/Output Setting File Version
208 controller RS232C-1 Communication Speed bps
209 controller RS232C-1 Parity
210 controller RS232C-1 Stop Bit bit
211 controller RS232C-1 Word Length bit
300 Connected Fieldbus Information
301 ANYBUS-CC Version
302 controller Setting Fieldbus Information
303 Station No. (Node Address) (1 ~ 64 or 0 ~ 63)
304 Communication Speed (0 ~ 4)
305 Occupied Stations (1, 2, 3, 4)
306 Extended Cyclic Setting (1, 2, 4, 8)
307 I/O Setting Byte Length “PLC → MASTER Axis”
Option 308 I/O Setting Byte Length “Master Axis → PLC”
Information1 309 Message Block Byte Length
310 Message Setting Byte Length “PLC → MASTER Axis”
311 Message Setting Byte Length “Master Axis → PLC”
312 IP Address (upper 6 digits)
313 IP Address (lower 6 digits)
314 Subnet Mask (upper 6 digits)
315 Subnet Mask (lower 6 digits)
316 Gateway (upper 6 digits)
317 Gateway (lower 6 digits)

PAGE 6-41
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

Setting
Item D-No. Contents Unit
change
400 CF Card Storage Capacity %
401 RS232C-2 Communication Speed bps
402 RS232C-2 Parity
403 RS232C-2 Stop Bit bit
404 RS232C-2 Word Length bit
405 Not used
Option 406 Not used
Information2 407 Not used
408 Not used
409 ID Input Selection
410 Add STX, ETX
411 External Input Select
412 Reference Data Start
413 Reference Data End
500 Touch Panel Connection IP Address (upper 6 digits) ○
501 Touch Panel Connection IP Address (lower 6 digits) ○
Touch Panel 502 Touch Panel Language Select ○
503 Touch Panel Connection Port Number ○
504 Touch Panel Numer of Retries ○

PAGE 6-42
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

System Parameters (controller Information 1)


D-No.000 Torque Unit
All fastening parameters within the Controller will have the same torque unit.
Set Value 0 1 2 3 4
Unit N・m kgm kgcm Ftlbs Inlbs

D-No. 001 Software Version Cannot be changed.


This is the software version of the controller.
D-No. 002 Amplifier Version Cannot be changed.
This is the amplifier version.
D-No. 003 System Indication Cannot be changed.
Indicates whether the controller is a multi system or a single system configuration.
This is also used to change between the multi system and the single system.
The handheld tool operates only in the single system setting.

Single Multi
System System

D-No. 004 External Gear Ratio Setting range: 0.300 ~ 3.000, standard setting: 1.000
Used to adjust the gear ratio when an external head (that has a gear ratio other than 1:1) is connected
to the output shaft of the tool. Do not use a value other than the standard setting (1.000) unless an
external offset gear is attached.
D-No.005 / 006 For adjustment by the manufacturer
Not used.
D-No. 007 Communication Axis Indication
This indicates whether the controller is the MASTER spindle for (PC) communication
and I/O (PLC) communication or is a SLAVE Spindle

MASTER Axis SLAVE Axis

D-No. 008 Axis Cycle Count (×1 million) D-No. 009 Axis Cycle Count (×1)
Indicates the number of fastening cycles the controller has performed.
* When the count is less than 1 million, [------] is indicated for D-No. 008.

PAGE 6-43
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

D-No.010 controller Maximum Current Cannot be changed


This indicates the maximum current value of the controller.
D-No. 011 IP Address (upper 6 digits) D-No. 012 IP Address (lower 6 digits)
Setting range: 0 to 255
The IP address for the controller Ethernet port is set here. In a MULTI system, the Ethernet port for
the MASTER spindle is only used. (Slave spindles will still display IP addresses, but are not used)

D-No. 013 Subnet Mask (upper 6 digits) D-No. 014 Subnet Mask (lower 6 digits)
Setting range: 0 ~ 255
The subnet mask is set here.
D-No. 015 Default Gateway (upper 6 digits) Setting range: 0 ~ 255
D-No. 016 Default Gateway (lower 6 digits) Setting range: 0 ~ 255
The default gateway is set here.

・ After changing the settings of D-Nos. 011 ~ 016, power must be cycled on the
controller for the settings to activate.
・Changes can only be made when the controller is in Program mode (“ProG”indicated in
Caution the upper display) The controller must be put back to RUN mode (“ProG” no longer
displayed in upper display) before powering down or the change will not be stored to
memory.

D-No. 017 MAC Address (upper 6 digits) D-No. 018 MAC Address (lower 6 digits)
Cannot be changed
The MAC address is indicated.
D-No. 019 RTC: Year/Month/Day Setting range: 13~99 (year), 1~12 (month), 1~31 (day)
D-No. 020 RTC: Time Setting range: 0 ~ 23 (hours), 0 ~ 59 (minutes), 0 ~ 59 (seconds)
The date and time of the real time clock (RTC) The range for the year is 2013 ~ 2099.
* This is not indicated at a SLAVE Axis of the multi system.
D-No. 021 Erase Fastening Record/Format CF Card
Erasing of the fastening results history can be executed. Please refer to “Copying of Parameters and
Erasing of the Fastening Result History” in Section 8-6 regarding the method for erasing the fastening
results history.
If installed, formatting of the CF card can be executed. Please refer to “Formatting the Memory Card”
regarding the method for formatting the CF card.
D-No. 022 Parameter Copy
Copying of parameters is performed. Please refer to “Copying of Parameters and Erasure of the
Fastening Result Record” regarding the method for copying parameters.
D-No.023,024,025,028,029 For Adjustment by the Manufacturer
Not used.

PAGE 6-44
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

D-No.026 controller SW1 Setting State D-No.027 controller SW2 Setting State
The setting states of the DIP switches of the controller (SW1 and SW2 on the controller bottom
panel) are indicated in the two upper right LED segments (“00H” means 00 hex)

D-No.026 D-No.027

The ON/OFF states of SW No. 1 ~ No. 8 are indicated in 8-bit hexadecimal code in the part in
which “00H” is indicated in the drawing above.

SW setting examples Indication examples

All OFF 00H


Only No. 1 ON 01H
Only No. 2 ON 02H
Only No. 3 ON 04H
Only No. 4 ON 08H
Only No. 5 ON 10H
Only No. 6 ON 20H
Only No. 7 ON 40H
Only No. 8 ON 80H
All ON FFH

PAGE 6-45
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation
System Parameters (Options)
SYS.030 Parameter Change Unlock Code Standard setting: 000000
Allows the setting of a numerical password to restrict Parameter setting from the front display panel.
When a value other than the standard setting (“000000”) is set, changing the controller to the
PROGRAM mode displays the password (numerical value) input screen.
By entering the value set in SYS.030 to the password input screen, the controller automatically will
change to the parameter setting screen/mode.
(This does NOT restrict changes from the HFC software – only changes from the front display)

D-No.033 System Option 1 Standard setting: 000000


Option 1 functions setting
xxxxx1: Accept Relay output (0:constant / 1:pulse)
・Set to “1” for a QL-OK pulse type output signal of this output. “0” will be a constant output.
xxxx1x: Total Accept Relay Output (0:constant / 1:pulse)
・Set to “1” for a TOTAL-OK pulse type output signal of this output. “0” will be a constant output.
xxx1xx: Accept Relay Output Timing (0:300msec / 1:800msec)
・If the pulse method has been selected, select the pulse length here.
xx1xxx: Stop input (0: Open Stop / 1: Close Stop)
・Set to “1” if the logic of the STOP input signal needs NOT to be ON to run (B type contact)
x1xxxx: Self check (0: at cycle start / 1: only the first cycle)
・Set to "1" to perform the Zero/CAL check at the fastening start only in the first cycle.
(If the first cycle gets a judgement other than an ACCEPT, the check will be performed on the next
fastening cycle as well)

1xxxxx: Part ID input selection (0:Fieldbus / 1:RS232C-3)


・For selecting whether the part ID data will be input from a fieldbus message or by the RS232C-3
port. (the part ID input is used for marrying part ID to the resultant fastening data)

D-No.034 System Option 2 Standard setting: 000000


Optional 2 functions Setting
xxxxx1: WORK/Parameter # change (0: Display panel / 1: PLC I/O Signal)
・Set to “1” if the change of WORK/Parameter is to be performed from the PLC I/O (the change
cannot be performed from both the operation panel and the external I/O)
xxxx1x: Reversing switch (0: Slide / 1: Push Button)
· 0: P type, T type, Ltype, Dtype (Pistol, PTS, Zero Torque type)
· 1: A type, S type (Angle, Straight tool type)
xxx1xx: RS232C-1 output (0: PLC / 1: Ethernet)
· 0: RS232 outputs in ASCII PLC compatible format.
· 1: When using (optional) ETHERNET board (connected to RS232C-1)
xx1xxx: Reject (NG) result indication (0: enable / 1: disable)
・Set to “1” to disable the Reject (NG) result display indication
x1xxxx: Fieldbus Function Disable (0:OFF / 1: ON)
・Set to “1” to disable the Fieldbus when installed. (this will allow testing of the system without the
fieldbus interface being connected)

1xxxxx: WORK change priority (0: Fieldbus / 1: standard I/O)


・When the WORK/Parameter change (first option 2 item) is set to PLC I/O, select which I/O type will
be used.

PAGE 6-46
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

D-No.035 System Option 3 Standard setting: 000000


Option 3 function setting
xxxxx1: Restrict cycle start after Total Accept (0: OFF ./ 1: ON).
・Set to “1” to prohibit a restart after a TOTAL-OK
In order to restart the fastening operation, turn ON any of the following input signals.
RESET
STOP
PROGRAM
Note: Even if the PLC I/O input signal [BATCH OK RESET] is turned "ON", the fastening
operation will not re-start.
(Even if the spindle judgment is REJECT (NG), the next fastening start will not be
performed before Controller firmware version 1.300)
xxxx1x:Initial display of Fastening Results (0:D-No.00 / 1:D-No.37)
When the controller is powered up, set the initial display preference of the fastening result
mode.
・0: D-No.00 Displays Peak Torque (only)
・1: D-No.37 Displays Peak torque (upper part) / Final angle (lower part)
xxx1xx:Display Stop Status (0:During Stop Input / 1:At Startup after STOP)
Changes the STOP status (controller) display condition
• 0: Displays STOP while the PLC I / O input signal [STOP] is "ON"
• 1:Displays while the PLC I / O input signal [STOP] is "ON" and the rising edge of the PLC
I/O input signal [START (REVERSE)] ("OFF" → "ON")
xx1xxx:CW / CCW Change Select (0:Ignore Tool CW/CCW switch / 1: Use Tool CW/CCW Switch)
When using a PLC START input signal, selects to ignore the tools CW/CCW switch or use
the CW/CCW switch for direction control
・0: Ignores the tool CW/CCW switch position and starts the fastening (directed by the
programmed parameter direction)
・1: Starts the fastening in the direction the tool CW/CCW switch is currently set in
x1xxxx:TB2-2_CF Warning signal output (0:Disable / 1:Enable)
Setup to use the PLC I/O output signal [CF WARNING] of I0 Terminal Block TB2-2.
・0: Disable – signal will not be output (do not connect)
・1: Signal is output when the CF card remaining capacity is less than 200 MB on the
controller with the CF card option installed.
1xxxxx:Special Function 1(0:OFF / 1:ON)
Not Used – Set to “0”
D-No.036 Gearhead Option Standard setting: 0, Setting range: 0 ~ 2
0: Standard head 1: Regular tube nut (bottom socket) 2: Inverted tube nut (top socket)
D-No.037 Start (starting) Switch Level Standard setting: 10, Setting range: 0 ~ 255
Please set 10.
D-No.038 High-speed Starting Switch Level Standard setting: 40, Setting range: 0 ~ 255
Please set 40.
*Set to 10 for ‘push to start’ tool (D) type.
D-No.039 Reverse Switch Level Standard setting: 10, Setting range: 0 ~ 255
Please set 10.
D-No.040~049 For Adjustment by the Manufacturer
Not used.

PAGE 6-47
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

System Parameters - Connected Tool Settings

D-No.100 Connected Tool No.


Assigned Tool No. corresponding to the connected tool model. Please refer to “Tool Models.”
D-No.101 Connected Tool Information
The maximum torque and motor capacity of D-No. 100 “Connected Tool No.”
D-No.102 Tool CAL Torque Decimal Point
The decimal point position of the torque value of D-No. 103 “Tool CAL Torque”.
D-No.103 Tool CAL Torque [N•m]
The CAL torque of the tool is displayed
D-No.104 Tool CAL Voltage [V]
The CAL voltage of the tool is displayed
D-No.105 Tool ZERO Voltage [V]
The ZERO voltage of the tool is displayed
D-No.106 Tool Internal Gear Ratio (×100)
The value obtained by multiplying the gear ratio of the tool by 100
D-No.107 Tool Serial No. (upper 3 digits) D-No.108 Tool Serial No. (lower 4 digits)
The serial No. of the tool is displayed
D-No.109 Tool Rotation Direction
The rotation direction of the tool is indicated. (CW: 0, CCW: 1)
D-No.110 Tool Order No. (upper 2 digits) D-No.111 Tool Order No. (lower 5 digits)
The order No. of the tool is displayed
D-No.112 Tool Cycle Count (×1 million)
D-No.113 Tool Cycle Count (×1)
Indicates the number of times (count) of fastening cycles performed by the connected tool.
* When the count is less than 1 million times, [------] is indicated for D-No. 112.
D-No.114 Tool Maximum Current [A]
This indicates the maximum current of the tool.

PAGE 6-48
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

System Parameters – Controller Information

D-No.200 Controller Setup Tool No. Setting range: Tool No. registered for the model
The Tool No. of the connected tool is settable (with reference to “Tool Models”). When the controller
setup tool no. is changed, initialization and automatic correction of the fastening parameter set values
is performed (for the new tool size connected)
D-No.201 Controller Setup Tool Information
The maximum torque and motor capacity of the tool of D-No. 200 “Controller Setup Tool No.” is
displayed
D-No.202 Parameter File Version
The version of the parameter file programmed in the controller is displayed
D-No.203 Sequence File Version
The version of the sequence file programmed in the controller is displayed
D-No.204 PLC Output Layout File Version
The version of the PLC output layout file programmed in the controller is displayed
D-No.205 Fieldbus File Version
The version of the fieldbus file programmed in the controller is displayed
D-No.206 Fieldbus Message File Version
The version of the fieldbus message file programmed in the controller is displayed
D-No.207 RS232C Input/Output File Version
The version of the RS232C input/output file programmed in the controller is displayed
D-No.208 Controller RS232C-1 Communication Speed [bps]
The communication speed of the RS232C-1 interface is displayed
D-No.209 Controller RS232C-1 Parity
The parity of the RS232C-1 interface is displayed

Odd Even None


Number Number

D-No.210 Controller RS232C-1 Stop Bit [bit]


The stop bit of the RS232C-1 interface is displayed
D-No.211 Controller RS232C-1 Data Length [bit]
The data length of the RS232C-1 interface is displayed

PAGE 6-49
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

System Parameters – Fieldbus I/O Interface Information

D-No.300 Connected Fieldbus Information


The type of fieldbus installed on the Expansion 1 is indicated.

No Expansion Unit 1 installed


(Standard IO)

MFC-CC Installed
(CC-Link)

MFC-PB Installed
MFC-DN (PROFIBUS
Installed DP-V1)
(DeviceNet)

MFC-PN Installed MFC-EN Installed


(PROFINET IO) (EtherNet/IP)

D-No.301 ANYBUS-CC Version (Fieldbus Only)


The ANYBUS-CompactCom interface version of the Expansion unit 1 is indicated.
D-No.302 Fieldbus Setup Information
Any fieldbus internal setup (in the controller) is indicated.

No Fieldbus setting

CC-Link V1 CC-Link V2

(See next page for use table)

PAGE 6-50
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

(“o” indicates which fieldbus uses which SYS D-No)


PROFIBUS PROFINET
SYS.300 CC-Link DeviceNet EtherNet/IP
DP-V1 IO
SYS.303 ○ ○ ○ - -
SYS.304 ○ ○ - - -
SYS.305 ○ - - - -
SYS.306 ○ - - - -
SYS.307 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
SYS.308 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
SYS.309 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
SYS.310 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
SYS.311 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
SYS.312 - - - ○ ○
SYS.313 - - - ○ ○
SYS.314 - - - ○ ○
SYS.315 - - - ○ ○
SYS.316 - - - ○ ○
SYS.317 - - - ○ ○

D-No.303 Station No. (Node Address) (CC-Link, DeviceNet, PROFIBUSDP-V1 only)


The programmed station No. (node address) of the installed fieldbus is displayed
Fieldbus Type
CC-Link DeviceNet PROFIBUSDP-V1
1~64 0~63 0~125

D-No.304 Communication Speed Setting range: 0 ~ 4 (CC-Link, DeviceNet)


The programmed communication speed of the installed fieldbus is displayed

System Parameter D-No.304


Fieldbus Type
0 1 2 3 4
CC-Link 156kbps 625kbps 2.5Mbps 5Mbps 10Mbps
DeviceNet 125kbps 250kbps 500kbps - -

D-No.305 Occupied Stations Setting range: 1 ~ 4 (CC-Link only)


The CCLINK programmed number of occupied stations is displayed
D-No.306 Extended Cyclic Setting Setting range: 1, 2, 4, 8 (CC-Link Only)
The CCLINK programmed extended cyclic setting is displayed
D-No.307 I/O Setting Byte Length “PLC → HFC3000” [byte]
(besides standard IO and expansion IO)
The programmed I/O setting byte length for “PLC → HFC3000” of the installed fieldbus is displayed

D-No.308 I/O Setting Byte Length “HFC3000 → PLC” [byte]


(besides standard IO and expansion IO)
The programmed I/O setting byte length for “HFC3000 → PLC” of the fieldbus is displayed

PAGE 6-51
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

D-No.309 Message Block Byte Length [byte] (Fieldbus only)


The programmed message block byte length of the fieldbus set in the controller is indicated.

Fieldbus type
CC-Link DeviceNet PROFIBUSDP-V1 PROFINET IO EtherNet/IP
144byte 250 byte 64 byte 250 byte 250 byte

D-No.310 Message Setting Byte Length “PLC → HFC3000” [byte] (Fieldbus only)
The programmed message setting byte length for “PLC → HFC3000” of the installed fieldbus is
indicated.

D-No.311 Message Setting Byte Length “HFC3000 → PLC” [byte] (Fieldbus only)
The programmed message setting byte length for “HFC3000 → PLC” of the installed
fieldbus is indicated.

D-No.312 IP Address (upper 6 digits) D-No.313 IP Address (lower 6 digits)


Setting range: 0 ~ 255 (PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP)
The programmed IP address of the installed fieldbus is indicated.
D-No.314 Subnet Mask (upper 6 digits) D-No.315 Subnet Mask (lower 6 digits)
Setting range: 0 ~ 255 (PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP)
The programmed subnet mask of the installed fieldbus is indicated.
D-No.316 Gateway (upper 6 digits) D-No.317 Gateway (lower 6 digits)
Setting range: 0 ~ 255 (PROFINET IO, EtherNet/IP)
The programmed gateway of the installed fieldbus is indicated.

PAGE 6-52
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

System Parameters – CF / RS232 Input Information

D-No.400 CF Card Storage Capacity [%]


The storable capacity of the CF card is displayed.
D-No.401 RS232C-2 Communication Speed [bps]
The communication speed of the RS232C-2 interface is displayed.
D-No.402 RS232C-2 Parity
The parity of the RS232C-2 interface is displayed.
D-No.403 RS232C-2 Stop Bit [bit]
The stop bit of the RS232C-2 interface is displayed.
D-No.404 RS232C-2 Data Length [bit]
The data length of the RS232C-2 interface is displayed.
D-No.405 Not used

D-No.406 Not used

D-No.407 Not used

D-No.408 Not used

D-No.409 ID Input Selection


The selected ID input method is displayed (Fieldbus / RS232C-2)

SYS.410 Add STX,ETX


When ID Data input is selected as RS232C - 2, it displays if STX or ETX tis added to data output.
SYS.411 External Input Select
Displays the Work / Parameter Number selection method
・PLC Input Signal ・ID input ・HFC3000 Software

SYS.412 Reference Data Start SYS.413 Reference Data end


When External ID Input is Selected, displays the start and end position of the ID data being used for
identification of the Work number. Set the Reference Data End to the same value or larger than the
Reference Data Start.
(The work number identification string (model name) can only be set using the HFC3000
user console software)

PAGE 6-53
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

System Parameters – Remote Touch panel Information

D-No. 500 IP Address (upper 6 digits) D-No. 501 IP Address (lower 6 digits)
Setting range: 0 ~ 255
The IP address of the remote touch panel connected to the controller is displayed.
D-No.502 Touch Panel Function / Language Setup Standard setting:0 Setting range: 0~4
Allows disable / enable of the remote touch panel function and the language setting
●0: Disables the remote touch panel function
● 1-4: Enables and sets the language according to the chart below
D-No.502 0 1 2~4
Language/ Language/
Setting Details Touch Panel Function Disable
Japanese English
D-No.503 TCPIP Port Number Standard setting:1024 Setting range: 1024~65535

The TCPIP Port Number of the touch panel connected in the controller is displayed.
SYS.504 Touch Panel Number of Retries Standard setting:0 Setting range:0~9
Allows the setting of automatic communication retries if the fastening result is experiencing
communication errors. Sets the number of automatic retires in the case of communication errors.
(A fastening START can not be performed during a retry)

・After changing the settings of D-Nos. 500 ~ 504, power must be cycled on the
controller for the settings to activate.
・Changes can only be made when the controller is in Program mode (“ProG”indicated
in the upper display) The controller must be put back to RUN mode (“ProG” no longer
Caution
displayed in upper display) before powering down or the change will not be stored to
memory.

PAGE 6-54
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-6-2 Fastening Parameters (Items in gray cells are not displayed)


Torque Angle
Item PAR No. D-No. Contents
Method Method
000 Fastening Method 0 1
001 Fastening Steps ○ ○
002 Fastening Option ○ ○
Fastening P.01~
003 Judgment Item 1 ○ ○
Settings P.64
004 Judgment Item 2 ○ ○
005 After Fastening Operation ○ ○
006 Interrupt Operation During Fastening ○ ○
100 Calibration Torque ○ ○
101 Peak Torque Low Limit ○ ○
102 Peak Torque High Limit ○ ○
103 Standard Torque ○
104 Ramp Down Start Torque ○ ○
105 1st Torque ○ ○
107 Snug Torque ○ ○
108 Snug Torque High Limit ○ ○
109 2nd Torque ○ ○
110 Reverse Torque High Limit ○ ○
Torque P.01~
111 Torque Inhibit Limit ○ ○
[N・m] P.64
112 Rate 1 Start Torque ○ ○
113 Rate 1 End Torque ○ ○
114 Rate 2 (Differential Angle) Start Torque ○ ○
115 Rate 2 (Differential Angle) End Torque ○ ○
116 Rate 3 Start Torque ○ ○
117 Rate 3 End Torque ○ ○
118 Final Torque Low Limit ○ ○
119 Final Torque High Limit ○ ○
120 Option △ △
121 1 Pulse Reverse Torque High Limit ○ ○
200 Final Angle Low Limit ○ ○
201 Final Angle High Limit ○ ○
202 Standard Angle ○
203 1st Angle ○ ○
204 2nd Angle ○ ○
Angle P.01~
205 Torque Inhibit Angle ○ ○
[deg] P.64
206 Differential + Angle ○ ○
207 Differential – Angle ○ ○
208 Option △ △
209 Correction Angle △ △
211 Option △ △
△: Unavailable.

PAGE 6-55
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

Torque Angle
Item PAR No. D-No. Contents
Method Method
300 Rate 1 Low Limit ○ ○
301 Rate 1 High Limit ○ ○
302 Rate 2 Low Limit ○ ○
303 Rate 2 High Limit ○ ○
304 Rate 3 Low Limit ○ ○
Rate 305 Rate 3 High Limit ○ ○
[N・m/deg] P.01~P.64 310 Initial Time ○ ○
Time [sec] 311 1st Time Low Limit ○ ○
312 1st Time High Limit ○ ○
313 2nd Time Low Limit ○ ○
314 2nd Time High Limit ○ ○
315 Torque Recovery Time ○ ○
316 1 Pulse Reverse Time ○ ○
400 Initial Speed ○ ○
401 Freerun Speed ○ ○
402 1st Speed ○ ○
403 2nd Speed ○ ○
404 3rd Speed ○ ○
Speed
P.01~P.64 405 Reverse 1 Speed ○ ○
[rpm]
406 Reverse Speed between 1-2 Step ○ ○
407 Reverse Speed between 2-3 Step ○ ○
408 Ramp Up Time ○ ○
409 FreeRun Ramp Down Time ○ ○
410 1 Pulse Reverse Speed ○ ○
500 Freerun Revolutions ○ ○
501 Reverse Revolutions between 1-2 Step ○ ○
502 Reverse Revolutions between 2-3 Step ○ ○
Revolution 503 Rundown Revolution Low Limit ○ ○
[rev] 504 Rundown Revolution High Limit ○ ○
P.01~P.64
Current 505 Reverse Revolutions before Fastening ○ ○
[%] 520 Full Scale Current Value ○ ○
521 Low Current Limit ○ ○
522 High Current Limit ○ ○
523 Fastening Current Limit ○ ○

PAGE 6-56
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

Torque Angle
Item PAR No. D-No. Contents
Method Method
540 Number of Accept [times] ○ ○
Others P.01~P.64
541 Angle Head Torque Variation Rate[%] ○ ○
542 CW Servo Lock Time Between Steps ○ ○
543 CW Wait Time Between Steps ○ ○
Time 544 Ramp Down Time ○ ○
P.01~P.64
[msec] 545 Final Ramp Down Time ○ ○
546 Reverse Ramp Up Time ○ ○
547 CCW Wait Time Between Steps ○ ○
548 Option △ △
Others P.01~P.64
549 Option △ △
550 Recovery Pulsing Count ○ ○
551 Recovery Pulsing Speed [rpm] ○ ○
552 Pulse Fastening Stop Servo Lock Time [ms] ○ ○
Pulsing P.01~P.64 553 Pulse Fastening Wait Time [ms] ○ ○
554 Pulse Fastening Operation Time [ms] ○ ○
555 Pulse Fastening Operation Angle [deg] ○ ○
556 Pulse Fastening Ramp Up Time [ms] ○ ○
560 CW Swing Stop Angle [deg] ○ ○
561 CW Swing Pause Angle [deg] ○ ○
562 CW Swing Pause Servo Lock Time [ms] ○ ○
563 CW Swing Resume Dwell Time [ms] ○ ○
Gyro P.01~P.64
570 CCW Swing Stop Angle [deg] ○ ○
571 CCW Swing Pause Angle [deg] ○ ○
572 CCW Swing Pause Servo Lock Time [ms] ○ ○
573 CCW Swing Resume Dwell Time [ms] ○ ○
580 Sequence Mode ○ ○
581 Sequence Stage 1 ○ ○
582 Sequence Stage 2 ○ ○
583 Sequence Stage 3 ○ ○
Sequence P.01~P.64 584 Sequence Stage 4 ○ ○
585 Sequence Stage 5 ○ ○
586 Sequence Stage 6 ○ ○
587 Sequence Stage 7 ○ ○
588 Sequence Stage 8 ○ ○
589 option △ △
590 option △ △
591 option △ △
592 option △ △
593 option △ △
Not Used P.01~P.64 594 option △ △
595 option △ △
596 option △ △
597 option △ △
598 option △ △
599 option △ △

PAGE 6-57
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

Fastening Settings
D-No.000 Fastening Method Standard setting: 0
Sets the Fastening Method.
0: Torque Method, 1: Angle Method

D-No. 001 Fastening Steps Standard setting: 1


The number of steps used in fastening
1: 1-Step Fastening
・ Fastening is performed using D-No. 103 [Standard Torque] or D-No. 202 [Standard Angle] as a
target stopping point (with no stops in between)
2: 2-Step Fastening
・ After fastening is started, the fastening is stopped momentarily at D-No. 105 [1st Torque] or D-No.
203 [1st Angle] before continuing to the target torque or angle. (the stop time between steps
differs by system and may be unnoticeable viewing the spindle rotation).
3: 3-Step Fastening
・ After fastening is started, fastening is stopped momentarily twice, at D-No. 105 [1st Torque] or
D-No. 203 [1st Angle] and at D-No. 109 [2nd Torque] or D-No. 204 [2nd Angle]. After the second
momentary stop, fastening to the set target value is performed. (the stop time between steps
differs by system and may be unnoticeable viewing the spindle rotation).
D-No. 002 Fastening Option Standard setting: 010000
The option used in fastening is set.
*****1: Reverse Before Fastening (can only be used in the single system)
・ Before the start of the fastening operation, reverse rotation at D-No. 405 [Reverse 1 Speed] is
executed for D-No. 505 [Reverse Revolutions before Fastening].
****1*: Fastening Direction CCW
・This is a special fastening option for performing a screw loosening operation or for fastening
left-hand screws, etc. Using this setting, normal rotation is performed in the CCW direction
(counterclockwise direction) and reverse rotation is performed in the CW direction (clockwise
direction).

***1**: Torque Hold Between Steps [NOT USED FOR HFC3000]


・ In 2-step fastening, 1/4 of the Standard Torque setting is maintained upon reaching 1st step (1st
torque, 1st angle) stopping until the subsequent fastening operation is restarted.
・ In 3-step fastening, 1/4 of the torque setting is maintained during the 1st step (1st torque, 1st
angle) and the 2nd step (2nd torque, 2nd angle) until the subsequent fastening operation is
restarted.

**1***: Disable Stored Curve Data Save


・ Disables curve storage (in controller) after the end of fastening (a Reject (NG) curve would still be
stored).
*1****: Disable Angle Count Below Snug Torque
・ Angle measurement is suspended while torque lower than Snug Torque is detected. (Final Angle
will only be reported when torque is at or above Snug Torque)
* When this is “0”, the angle measurement is continued regardless of the value of the torque after
Snug Torque is first detected.
1*****:Option [Not Used]

PAGE 6-58
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

The fastening judgment is not performed regardless of the values of the high and
low limit set values when the settings of fastening parameters D-No. 003
Caution
“Judgment Item 1” and D-No. 004 “Judgment Item 2” are set to “0” (off).

D-No. 003 Judgment Item 1 Default setting: 111101


*****1: Peak Torque Check Cannot be Disabled
・ Judge peak torque during the fastening operation is within the range of the high and low limit values
****1*: Final Torque Check
・ Judge final torque at the end of the fastening operation is within the high and low limit ranges
(Normally used only when ANGLE Control is the control method)
***1**: Final Angle Check Cannot be Disabled
・ Judge final angle at the end of the fastening operation is within the high and low limit ranges
The starting point of angle measurement is D-No. 107 [Snug Torque].
**1***: Rate 1 Check
・ Judge the 1st torque rate (slope) from D-No. 112 [Rate 1 Start Torque] to D-No. 113 [Rate 1 End
Torque] is within the high and low limit ranges when D- No. 113 [Rate 1 End Torque] is attained
*1****: Rate 2 Check
・ Judge the 2nd torque rate (slope) from D-No. 114 [Rate 2 Start Torque] to D-No. 115 [Rate 2 End
Torque] is within the high and low limit ranges when D- No. 115 [Rate 2 End Torque] is attained
1*****: Rate 3 Check
・ Judge the 3rd torque rate (slope) from D-No. 116 [Rate 3 Start Torque] to D-No. 117 [Rate 3 End
Torque] is within the high and low limit ranges when D- No. 117 [Rate 3 End Torque] is attained

PAGE 6-59
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

D-No. 004 Judgment Item 2 Default setting: 000001


*****1: Timeout Check Cannot be Disabled.
・ Judges whether the fastening has taken place within the set high/low time limits. 1 st Time is from
the start of fastening to D-No. 105 [1st Torque] or D-No. 205 [1st Angle]. 2nd Time is from D-No.
105 [1st Torque] or D-No. 205 [1st Angle] to the end of fastening.
****1*: Revolution Check
・ Judges the number of rundown revolutions from the start to end of fastening is within the high and
low limit ranges
***1**: Differential Angle Check
・ Judges the differential angle, calculated from the rate 2 from D-No.114 [Rate 2 Start Torque] to
D-No. 115 [Rate 2 End Torque] and the final torque, is within the high and low limit ranges
**1***: Snug Torque Check
・ Judges the torque value is below the Snug high limit when D-No. 107 [Snug Torque] is detected.
*1****: Break Away Torque Check
・ Judges the torque value is below the Reverse Torque high limit during reverse operation.
1*****: Torque Inhibit Check
・ Judges the torque value is below the Torque Inhibit limit during operation at D-No. 205 [Torque
Inhibit Angle].

PAGE 6-60
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

D-No.005 After Fastening Operation Default setting: 000000


*****1: 1 Pulse Reverse
・After the end of fastening, the torque is reversed up to the D-No. 121 [1 Pulse Reverse Torque High
Limit]. The 1 Pulse Reverse is performed at the D-No. 410 [1 Pulse Reverse Speed] for the
D-No. 316 [1 Pulse Reverse Time].
****1*: Reduce Fastening Reaction (priority given to Torque Recovery)
・The torque reaction force of the tool at the end of fastening is suppressed to help reduce operator
fatique, sudden shock to the operator or supporting equipment.
Motor current is decreased gradually after the end of fastening until stopped.
****1*: Torque Recovery
・ After the target is reached, the standard torque is maintained for the D-No. 315 [Torque Recovery
Time]. The fastening speed during execution of the torque recovery is the D-No. 404 [3rd
Speed].
***1**: Servo Lock (Hold)
・ At the end of fastening operation, the motor is locked to prevent rotation of the tool. (if backlash
exists in the transmission, socket or extensions, etc., some rotation could take place depending
on this backlash) The servo lock function is also performed if a reverse operation occurs from
the use of the REVERSE signal.
・ The servo lock can be released by turning “On” the PLC I/O input signals “START,” “RESET,” or
“BYPASS” or turning “STOP” to “OFF”. The fastening result mode D-No. 16 “Servo Lock Flag”
will show “ON” when it is used.

Depending on the controller version, to turn ‘Off’ the Servo Lock after fastening
differs depending on the controller firmware as shown below;

PLC I / O Firmware Version


input signal Below V1.305 V1.305 or more

START releases releases


RESET releases does not release
REVERSE does not release does not release
PROGRAM releases releases
STOP releases does not release

****1*: Recovery Pulse (priority given to Torque Recovery)


・A holding / retightening operation after fastening is performed using a pulsing function.
Pulsing operation cycles at the D-No. 551 [Recovery Pulsing Speed] are executed for the number of
times defined by D-No. 550 [Recovery Pulsing Count].

【Precautions on the After Fastening Operation】


・“Reduced Fastening Reaction” and “Recovery Pulse” operation are not performed
Caution when “Torque Recovery” is used.
If both (Reduced Fastening Reaction and Recovery Pulse) are setup to be used, only
the” Recovery Pulse Operation” is performed.

PAGE 6-61
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

D-No.006 Interrupt Operation During Fastening Default setting: 000000


*****1: Pulse Fastening Operation
・Set to “1” to enable pulse fastening function (pulsing is started after detection of 1ST Torque).
****1*: Gyro Setup Enable
・With a Pistol (P type or T type too)l, the Gyro operation functions are enabled when this is set to “1”
(ON).

Caution ● Using Firmware version V1.305 or higher the following setting values are enabled as
a safety stop function even if the gyro function is disabled.
· D-No.560 [CW Swing Stop Angle]
· D-No.570 [CCW Swing Stop Angle]
● Hold the start switch in the ON state until the end of fastening (tool is still)
If fastening is started with the tool in motion, the angle measurement
becomes unstable and the safety stop function may not work properly

***1**: Angle Head Torque Variation Monitor


・With an angle head tool, the torque variation is monitored when this is set to “1” (ON).
**1***: Reverse Between 1st-2nd Step
・If this is set to ON using a 2 step fastening, a reverse operation is performed before restarting (① in the
diagram below).
*1****: Reverse Between 2nd-3rd Step
・If this is set to ON using a 3 step fastening, a reverse operation is performed before restarting (② in the
diagram below).
547: CCW Wait Time Between Steps

STD

2ND
1ST
Starting lever: ON End of fastening

① ②
1STEP 2STEP 3STEP

505: Reverse Revolutions 501: Reverse Revolutions 502: Reverse Revolutions


before Fastening between 1-2 Step between 2-3 Step
405: Reverse 1 Speed 406: Reverse Speed 407: Reverse Speed
between 1-2 Step between 2-3 Step

PAGE 6-62
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

Torque
D-No. 100 Calibration Torque [N・m]
Setting range: 70% ~ 120% of the standard calibration torque of the tool
This sets the calibration torque value of the connected tool. In the case where the tool calibration
needs to be adjusted (due to outside influences such as a sockets, extensions, external offset gear
or workpiece characteristics, the indicated fastening result value differs from the result obtained by
a certified fastening torque tester, etc., the fastening torque can be corrected by this setting.

Changed calibration torque =


Measured torque (tester result) ÷ standard torque × Current calibration torque

Example: In the case of:


D-No. 100 [Calibration Torque] : 294.2N・m
D-No. 103 [Standard Torque] : 200.0N・m
Measured value (test result) : 210.0N・m
210.0N・m ÷ 200.0 N・m × 294.2N・m = 308.9N・m
Therefore, the calibration torque would be changed to 308.9N・m.

If the calibration torque is to be changed, calculate the average value from


multiple fastening results data (as a guideline based on a statistical standpoint,
use (20) as the sample number of the fastening results).
・ When the calibration torque is changed, confirm that other torque-related
Caution parameters are lower than the changed calibration torque. The other
torque-related parameters must be set to values lower than the maximum torque
value of the tool and the calibration torque.

D-No. 101 Peak Torque Low Limit [N・m] Setting range: 0 ~ D-No. 100 [Calibration Torque] × 1.1

D-No. 102 Peak Torque High Limit [N・m] Setting range: 0 ~ D-No. 100 [Calibration Torque] × 1.3
Sets the low and high limit values of the fastening torque.
When the fastening torque exceeds the peak torque high limit or falls below the peak torque low limit,
a REJECT judgment is made.

D-No. 103 Standard Torque [N・m]


Setting range: 0 ~ D-No. 100 [Calibration Torque] × 1.0
The standard torque is the target torque using Torque Control method. (only when D-No. 000
[Fastening Method] is the torque method)
Example: When 10.0 is set, fastening is executed until the torque value becomes 10.0[N・m].

[Caution Regarding Fastening]


Avoid performing fastening at a torque exceeding the maximum fastening torque of a
tool.
Caution Do not use a tool outside the specified duty cycle (ratio of fastening time and
downtime) range, even if the maximum fastening torque is not exceeded.

PAGE 6-63
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

D-No. 104 Ramp Down Start Torque [N・m]


Setting range: 0 ~ D-No. 100 [Calibration Torque] × 1.0
The torque value at which D-No. 401 [Freerun Speed] is switched to D-No. 402 [1st Speed] is set.
However, even if the ramp down start torque is not detected, switching to D-No. 402 [1st Speed] is
performed when D-No. 500 [Freerun Revolutions] is attained.
D-No. 105 1st Torque [N・m] Setting range: 0 ~ D-No. 100 [Calibration Torque] × 1.0
This is the end point of the 1st time from the start of fastening. The torque value at which D-No. 401
[Freerun Speed] or D-No. 402 [1st Speed] is switched to D-No. 402 [2nd Speed] is set. Switching to
D-No. 402 [2nd Speed] is also switched at the point at which the 1st torque or D-No. 203 [1st Angle]
is detected.
If the 1st torque is not to be used in the fastening control, input the same value as D-No. 100
[Calibration Torque].
D-No. 107 Snug Torque [N・m] Setting range: 0 ~ D-No. 100 [Calibration Torque] × 1.0
This is the torque at which angle measurement begins
If D-No. 000 [Fastening Method] is the angle method, this is the start point of fastening. Angle
measurement and judgment are started from the Snug torque.
(Example: In the case Snug torque is 10N•m, D-No.202 [Standard Angle] of 90deg)
Torque
202 Standard Angle
Peak Torque

107 Snug Torque


10 N・m
Angle
90deg
D-No. 108 Snug Torque High Limit [N・m]
Setting range: 0 ~ D-No. 100 [Calibration Torque] × 1.1
Sets the high limit value of the Snug torque. If the value of D-No.107 [Snug Torque] exceeds the
Snug torque high limit, a REJECT fastening judgment is made.
D-No. 109 2nd Torque [N・m] Setting range: 0 ~ D-No. 100 [Calibration Torque] × 1.0
When the 2nd torque or D-No. 204 [2nd Angle] is detected during operation at D-No. 402 [2nd
Speed], switching to D-No. 403 [3rd Speed] is performed.
If the 2nd torque is not to be used in the fastening control, input the same value as D-No. 100
[Calibration Torque].

PAGE 6-64
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

D-No. 110 Reverse Torque High Limit [N・m]


Setting range: 0 ~ D-No. 100 [Calibration Torque] × 1.3
Sets the reverse high limit value for torque during reverse operations. When the reverse torque
high limit is exceeded during a reverse operation, the fastening is stopped and abnormal A.09-08
“Reverse Torque Error” is generated.
♦Reverse Torque Judgment: [Disabled for below] •••
Manual reverse rotation by the PLC I/O input signal “REVERSE”
Reverse rotation operation by the lever on.
♦Reverse Torque Judgment: [Enabled for below] •••
Reverse operation by the fastening option “Reverse After Fastening”
Reverse operation by the fastening option “Reverse Between 1-2 Steps”
Reverse operation by the fastening option “Reverse Between 2-3 Steps”
・ D-No. 110 [Reverse Torque High Limit] Default limit of 5Nm is set as a safety limit – any bolt
fastened over 5Nm will automatically stop as a safety precaution – change the limit if a higher
Caution requirement is required by the application.

D-No. 111 Torque Inhibit Limit [N・m]


Setting range: 0 ~ D-No. 100 [Calibration Torque] × 1.3
Torque Inhibit ignores the torque at the start of fastening for the given rotation (D-No. 205 [Torque
Inhibit Angle]) This high limit sets a maximum torque that will be ignored during this process. If the
torque inhibit high limit is exceeded during the torque inhibit process a REJECT fastening judgment
is made.
D-No. 112 Rate 1 Start Torque [N・m] D-No. 113 Rate 1 End Torque [N・m]
Setting range: 0 ~ D-No. 100 [Calibration Torque] × 1.0
Sets the measurement start point and measurement end point of Torque Rate 1. The torque slope
(slope of torque vs. angle) from the rate 1 start torque to the rate 1 end torque is measured and
judged.
D-No. 114 Rate 2 Start Torque [N・m] D-No. 115 Rate 2 End Torque [N・m]
Setting range: 0 ~ D-No. 100 [Calibration Torque] × 1.0
Sets the measurement start point and measurement end point of Torque Rate 2 and the differential
angle. The torque slope (slope of torque vs. angle) from the rate 2 start torque to the rate 2 end
torque is measured and judged.
D-No. 116 Rate 3 Start Torque [N・m] D-No. 117 Rate 3 End Torque [N・m]
Setting range: 0 ~ D-No. 100 [Calibration Torque] × 1.0
Sets the measurement start point and measurement end point of Torque Rate 3. The torque slope
(slope of torque vs. angle) from the rate 3 start torque to the rate 3 end torque is measured and
judged.

PAGE 6-65
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

D-No. 118 Final Torque Low Limit [N・m] Setting range: 0 ~ D-No. 100 [Calibration Torque] × 1.1

D-No. 119 Final Torque High Limit [N・m] Setting range: 0 ~ D-No. 100 [Calibration Torque] × 1.3
Sets the low and high limit values of the torque at the end of fastening.
・ If D-No. 000 [Fastening Method] is the “Torque Method,” the values of the final torque and the peak
torque will be equal - therefore set the same values as D-No. 101 [Peak Torque Low Limit] and
D-No. 102 [Peak Torque High Limit]. * Set values that differ only when D-No. 006 [After
Fastening Operation]: “Torque Recovery” is used.
・ If D-No. 000 [Fastening Method] is the “Angle Method,” set the low and high and limit values of the
fastening torque at the point at which the standard angle is reached.
(Note: it is common when using Angle Control that fastener yielding takes place. In this case, the
peak torque reports the highest torque seen during the fastening while the final torque would show
the (lower yielded) torque when the standard angle is met and fastening ends)
If the fastening torque exceeds the final torque high limit or falls below the final torque low limit, a
REJECT judgment is made.
D-No.120 Option [N•m]
Setting range: 0 ~ D-No. 100 [Calibration Torque] × 1.0
*Not used

D-No. 121 1 Pulse Reverse Torque High Limit [N・m]


Setting range: 0 ~ D-No. 100 [Calibration Torque] × 1.1
Sets the (Reverse) torque limit for the torque used in the D-No. 006 [1 Pulse Reverse] operation.
Normally, set this to be no more than half the standard torque (to ensure a pre-fastened fasteners
clamp load is not unloaded (or backed out))

PAGE 6-66
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

Angle
D-No. 200 Final Angle Low Limit [deg] D-No. 201 Final Angle High Limit [deg]
Setting range: 0 ~ 9999.9
Sets the low and high limit values of the output judgment angle. When the fastening angle
exceeds the final angle high limit or falls below the final angle low limit, a REJECT judgment is made.
These are used to detect elongation or seizing of the fastener during fastening.

D-No. 203 1st Angle [deg] Setting range: 0 ~ 9999.9


This is the end point of 1st time from the start of fastening. Sets the torque value at which D-No. 401
[Freerun Speed] or D-No. 402 [1st Speed] is switched to D-No. 402 [2nd Speed]. Switching to D-No.
402 [2nd Speed] is also performed at the point at which D-No. 105 [1st Torque] or the 1st angle is
detected.
If the 1st angle is not to be used in the fastening control, input a value greater than D-No. 201 [Final
Angle High Limit].
D-No. 204 2nd Angle [deg] Setting range: 0 ~ 9999.9
When D-No. 109 [2nd Torque] or the 2nd angle is detected during operation at D-No. 402 [2nd Speed],
switching to D-No. 403 [3rd Speed] is performed.
If the 2nd angle is not to be used in the fastening control, input a value greater than D-No. 201 [Final
Angle High Limit].
・If 2-step or 3-step fastening is used, set a Standard Angle value greater than D-No.

Caution 203 [1st Angle] to D-No. 204 [2nd Angle].

D-No. 205 Torque Inhibit Angle [deg] Setting range: 0 ~ 9999.9


Sets the torque inhibit rotation angle (if used). The tool will rotate this number of degrees ignoring the
torque (but will still monitor torque that it does not exceed the Torque Inhibit high limit)
* When the torque inhibit angle is set to “0,” the torque inhibit check will not be performed.

・ "Torque Inhibit " does not work with the following settings;
・D-No. 004 [Output Judgment Item 2] : “Torque Inhibit Judgment” “0”
Caution
・D-No. 205 [Torque Inhibit Angle] : “0”

D-No. 206 Differential + Angle [deg] D-No. 207 Differential – Angle [deg]
Setting range: -999.9 ~ 999.9
The high and low limit values for the differential angle check are set. The differential angle
difference is judged from rate 2 and the final torque, regardless of the fastening method. To input a
negative value, move the cursor (flashing number) at the DATA Display to the position of “P” and then
press the “▲” or “▼” button to make “-“ be indicated at the cursor position.
D-No.208 Option [deg] Setting range: 0 ~ 9999.9
*Not used
D-No.209 Correction Angle [deg] Setting range: -99.9 ~ 99.9
*Default Setting: “0” [Only to be used if angle correction is necessary after checking with a master
tranducer]

D-No.211 Option [deg] Setting range: 0.1 ~ 10.0


*Not used

PAGE 6-67
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

Rate
D-No. 300 Rate 1 Low Limit [N・m/deg]
Setting range: - maximum torque rate of tool ~ maximum torque rate of tool
Sets the low limit value of Rate 1 (slope of torque vs. angle) between the two points of D-No. 112
[Rate 1 Start Torque] ~ D-No. 113 [Rate 1 End Torque]. A judgment is made at the point at which
D-No. 113 [Rate 1 End Torque] is attained.
D-No. 301 Rate 1 High Limit [N・m/deg]
Setting range: - maximum torque rate of tool ~ maximum torque rate of tool
Sets the high limit value of Rate 1 (slope of torque vs. angle) between the two points of D-No. 112
[Rate 1 Start Torque] ~ D-No. 113 [Rate 1 End Torque]. A judgment is made at the point at which
D-No. 113 [Rate 1 End Torque] is attained.
D-No. 302 Rate 2 Low Limit [N・m/deg]
Setting range: - maximum torque rate of tool ~ maximum torque rate of tool
Sets the low limit value of Rate 2 (slope of torque vs. angle) between the two points of D-No. 114
[Rate 2 Start Torque] ~ D-No. 115 [Rate 2 End Torque]. A judgment is made at the point at which
D-No. 115 [Rate 2 End Torque] is attained.
D-No. 303 Rate 2 High Limit [N・m/deg]
Setting range: - maximum torque rate of tool ~ maximum torque rate of tool
Sets the high limit value of Rate 2 (slope of torque vs. angle) between the two points of D-No. 114
[Rate 2 Start Torque] ~ D-No. 115 [Rate 2 End Torque]. A judgment is made at the point at which
D-No. 115 [Rate 2 End Torque] is attained.
D-No. 304 Rate 3 Low Limit [N・m/deg]
Setting range: - maximum torque rate of tool ~ maximum torque rate of tool
Sets the low limit value of Rate 3 (slope of torque vs. angle) between the two points of D-No. 116
[Rate 3 Start Torque] ~ D-No. 117 [Rate 3 End Torque]. A judgment is made at the point at which
D-No. 117 [Rate 3 End Torque] is attained.
D-No. 305 Rate 3 High Limit [N・m/deg]
Setting range: - maximum torque rate of tool ~ maximum torque rate of tool
Sets the high limit value of Rate 3 (slope of torque vs. angle) between the two points of D-No. 116
[Rate 3 Start Torque] ~ D-No. 117 [Rate 3 End Torque]. A judgment is made at the point at which
D-No. 117 [Rate 3 End Torque] is attained.
* To input a negative value for any of D-No. 300 ~ D-No. 305, move the cursor (flashing number) at
the DATA Display to the position of “P” and then press the “▲” or “▼” button to make “-“ be
indicated at the cursor position.

・The minimum (maximum) torque rate of a tool differs according to the tool model.
Please refer to “Tool Models” regarding the allowed input range.
Caution

PAGE 6-68
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation
Time
D-No. 310 Initial Time [sec] Setting range: 0.0 ~ 999.9
Setting of Initial time can be used as a slower rpm to aid in socket / fastener engagement, reduce
initial engagement shock, etc., at the start of fastening. Operation at D-No. 400 [Initial Speed] is
executed during the initial time or during D-No. 500 [Freerun Revolutions].
When “0.0” is set as the initial time, operation is started at D-No. 401 [Freerun Speed]. When “0.0” is
set as D-No.500 [Freerun Revolutions], operation at the initial speed is executed for the initial time
and thereafter, operation at the 1st speed is executed.
D-No. 311 1st Time Low Limit [sec] Setting range: 0.0 ~ 999.9
Sets the value of the 1st time low limit until D-No. 105 [1st Torque] or D-No. 203 [1st Angle] is attained
from the start of fastening. If the time falls short of the 1st time low limit, a REJECT judgment is made.
D-No. 312 1st Time High Limit [sec] Setting range: 0.0 ~ 999.9
Sets the value of the 1st time high limit until D-No. 105 [1st Torque] or D-No. 203 [1st Angle] is
attained from the start of fastening. If the 1st time high limit is exceeded, a REJECT judgment is
made.
D-No. 313 2nd Time Low Limit [sec] Setting range: 0.0 ~ 999.9
Sets the value of the 2nd time low limit until D-No. 103 [Standard Torque] or D-No. 202 [Standard
Angle] is attained from D-No. 105 [1st Torque] or D-No. 203 [1st Angle].
If the 2nd time falls below the 2nd time low limit, a REJECT judgment is made.
D-No. 314 2nd Time High Limit [sec] Setting range: 0.0 ~ 999.9
Sets the value of the 2nd time high limit until D-No. 103 [Standard Torque] or D-No. 202 [Standard
Angle] is attained from D-No. 105 [1st Torque] or D-No. 203 [1st Angle].
If the 2nd time high limit is exceeded, a REJECT judgment is made.
D-No. 315 Torque Recovery Time [sec] Setting range: 0.0 ~ 5.0
After Standard Torque is reached, standard torque is maintained for the duration of Torque Recovery
Time. (May be used to remedy cases where torque relaxation after fastening is occurring)
* Typically, this is set to 0 sec.
Note: Overuse use of this may generate an overload abnormal (Abn.08-10) if motor duty
becomes excessive for the application / cycle time used. If Abnormals occur, reduce the torque
recovery time.
D-No.316 1 Pulse Reverse Time [sec] Setting range: 0.0 ~ 9.99
Time used for D-No. 006 [After Fastening Operation]: “1 Pulse Reverse.”
“1 pulse reverse” is used to help alleviate sockets that lock-up on fasteners providing a means to
‘free’ the socket without backing out the fastener.

D-No. 408 Ramp Up Time [sec] Setting range: 0.1 ~ 5.0, Default setting: 0.5
Sets the time constant for acceleration from zero speed to the maximum speed of a tool in the
fastening operation.
・ Adjusts the speed profile from the start of fastening (Start signal “OFF” → “ON”) to reach the
programmed speeds of D-No. 400 “Initial Speed” or D-No. 401 “Freerun Speed.”
D-No.409 Ramp Down Time [sec] Setting range: 0.0 ~ 5.0, standard setting: 0.5
Sets the time constant for deceleration from maximum speed to zero speed of a tool upon reaching
D-No. 500 [Freerun Revolutions] in the fastening operation.
The deceleration time constant also used during manual reversing.

PAGE 6-69
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

Speed

・ The minimum and maximum tool rotation speed differs according to the tool model.
Please refer to “Tool Models” regarding the allowed input range.
Caution

D-No. 400 Initial Speed [rpm]


Setting range: Minimum tool speed to maximum tool speed
Setting of Initial speed can be used as a slower rpm to aid in socket / fastener engagement, reduce
initial engagement shock, etc., at the start of fastening. Operation of initial speed is executed during
D-No. 310 [Initial Time].
D-No. 401 Freerun Speed [rpm]
Setting range: Minimum tool speed to maximum tool speed
Sets the ‘high-speed’ rotation speed after the end of D-No. 310 [Initial Time]. Rotation at the freerun
speed is performed for D-No. 500 [Freerun Revolutions] or until D-No. 104 [Ramp Down Start Torque]
is attained.
D-No.402 1ST Speed [rpm]
Setting Range:Minimum tool speed to maximum tool speed
Set the speed between D-No.401 [Freerun Speed] and D-No.403 [2ND Speed].
The system rotates at the 1ST Speed until D-No.105 [1ST Torque] is detected from D-No.104 [Slow
Down Start Torque] or until D-No.203 [1ST Angle] is detected from D-No.104 [Ramp Down Start
Torque].
*If D-No.105 [1ST Torque] or D-No.203 [1ST Angle] is reached during the D-No.401 [Freerun Speed],
1ST Speed will be switched over to D-No.403 [2ND Speed].
D-No.403 2ND Speed [rpm]
Setting Range:Minimum tool speed to maximum tool speed
Sets the speed after 1st Torque is reached.
The speed used after D-No.105 [1ST Torque] or D-No.203 [1ST Angle] is reached. (in a 1 or 2-Step
fastening, this is the slower speed used for final torque process)
* Fastening accuracy is improved the slower the 2ND Speed is set.
D-No.404 3RD Speed [rpm]
Setting Range:Minimum tool speed to maximum tool speed
Sets the speed after 2nd Torque is reached
This is the speed after D-No.106 [2ND Torque] or D-No.204 [2ND Angle] is reached.
* Fastening accuracy is improved the slower the 3rd Speed is set.
Set the same value as D-No.403 [2ND Speed], if a different 3RD Speed is not used.

PAGE 6-70
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

D-No.405 Reverse 1 Speed [rpm]


Setting range: Minimum tool speed to maximum tool speed
Sets the speed during reverse operation.
The speed at which reverse rotation is performed while the REV. pushbutton on the controller is
pushed, When the Reverse-FWD tool switch is rotated to the reverse position or the Reverse I/O
signal is turned on.
This is also the speed used in D-No. 002 [Fastening Option]: “Reverse before Fastening.”
D-No.406 Reverse Speed between 1-2 Step [rpm]
Setting range: Minimum tool speed to maximum tool speed
Sets the speed during reverse operation between 1st and 2nd Step if used.
This is the speed used in D-No. 006 [Fastening Interrupt Operation]: “Reverse Between 1-2 Steps
ON.”
D-No.407 Reverse Speed between 2-3 Step [rpm]
Setting range: Minimum tool rotation speed to maximum tool rotation speed
Sets the speed during reverse operation between 2nd and 3rd Step if used.
This is the speed used in D-No. 006 [Fastening Interrupt Operation]: “Reverse Between 2-3 Steps
ON.”
D-No.410 1 Pulse Reverse Speed [rpm]
Setting range: Minimum tool rotation speed to maximum tool rotation speed
The speed used during D-No. 005 [After Fastening Operation]: “1 Pulse Reverse.”

PAGE 6-71
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

Revolutions/Current
D-No. 500 Freerun Revolutions [rev.] Setting range: 0 ~ 99.9
Sets the number of revolutions before D-No.401 [Freerun Speed] is switched to D-No.402 [1ST Speed].
Even if the Freerun Speed Revolution is not reached, it switches to D-No.402 [1ST Speed] when the
D-No.104 [Ramp Down Start Torque] is detected.
If “0.0” is set for D-No. 500 [Freerun Revolutions], operation at the 1st speed is executed after
operation at Initial Speed has been performed for D-No. 310 [Initial Time].
D-No. 501 Reverse Revolutions between 1-2 Step [rev.] Setting range: 0 ~ 99.9
This is the number of revolutions used for D-No. 006 [Fastening Interrupt Operation]: “Reverse
Between 1-2 Steps ON.”
D-No. 502 Reverse Revolutions between 2-3 Step [rev.] Setting range: 0 ~ 99.9
This is the number of revolutions used for D-No. 006 [Fastening Interrupt Operation]: “Reverse
Between 2-3 Steps ON.”
D-No. 503 Rundown Revolution Low Limit [rev.] D-No. 504 Rundown Revolution High Limit [rev.]
Setting range: 0 ~ 99.9
Sets the low and high limit values for the number of revolutions rotated from the start of fastening to
the end of fastening.
If the number of revolutions at the end of fastening exceeds the rundown revolution high limit or falls
below the rundown revolution low limit, a REJECT judgment is made.
D-No.505 Reverse Revolutions before Fastening [rpm] Setting range: 0 ~ 99.9
This is the number of revolutions used for [Fastening Option]: “Reverse before Fastening.”
D-No.520 No Load Current Value [%] D-No.523 Fastening Current Limit [%]
Setting range: 0 ~ 100
Sets the current limit value which limits the amount of current output during the following
operations;
D-No.520: Limits output current during ‘initial speed ~ free run speed’ and during reverse
rotation
D-No.523: Limits output current during ‘1ST speed ~ until fastening operation is
completed"
By setting a value lower than 100%, max. torque will be limited (to the percentage input
in the D-No 520 or 523 operation)
D-No.521 Low Current Warning [%] D-No.522 High Current Warning [%]
Setting Range:0 ~ 100
The Current Warning low/high signals can currently only be used when using the integrated PLC
function

PAGE 6-72
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

Other / Time
D-No.540 Number of Accept [#] Setting range: 0~99
When using the “Batch’ function, the number of Accept fastenings to designate a ‘Batch OK’.
(Example: if set to ‘4’, you would need four consecutive Acceptable fastenings to output a ‘Batch OK’
signal and light the TOTAL OK on the front of the controller)
D-No.541 Angle Head Torque Variation Rate [%] Default value: 0, Setting range: 0~100
When torque reaches Standard Torque and the monitored torque curve variation shows the
percentage (%) of torque variation exceeds this setting, an angle head error occurs (abnormal
A.09-10 “Angle head torque variation abnormal”).
*The torque variation check can only be performed with an angle head type (-A) tool.
D-No.542 Pause-Between-Steps Servo Lock Time [msec] Default value: 5
Setting range: 0~200
Sets the servo lock time between steps. (Servo lock after 1st or 2nd Torque)
This is used when a 2-step fastening or 3-step fastening is performed.
D-No.543 Pause-Between-Steps Restart Time [msec] Default value: 15
Setting range: 0~200
Sets the pause time (no rotation) after the fastening has stopped between steps (when function is
enabled)
When the restart time is increased, the fastening time is correspondingly increased.
(Can be used during 2-step fastening or 3-step fastening only)
D-No.544 Ramp Down Time Setting range:0~200ms (Default value: 0)
D-No.545 Final Ramp Down Time Setting range:0~200ms (Default value: 0)
Sets the speed ramp down profile.
Note: May be increased to prevent damage to the tool that occurs during deceleration when high
speeds are used and may affect torque accuracy.
Ramp Down Time ••• Freerun speed → Attainment of ramp down start torque → Speed ramp down
→ 1st speed
Note: For older versions, when the front panel SW1-3 is turned ON
(deceleration operation), the ramp down time is set to 16msec
Final Ramp Down Time ••• Ordinary stop (OK/NG/START_OFF)

SPEED
MAX
500: Freerun Revolutions OK/NG/START_OFF stop

310: Initial Time


401: Freerun
Speed ①

402: 1st Speed


400: Initial Speed 104: Ramp Down
Start Torque 403: 2nd Speed

TIME
544: Ramp Down Time 545: Final Ramp Down Time
105: 1st Torque/203 1st Angle

① Freerun speed → Attainment of freerun revolutions → 409: Slowdown Time (0.1~5.0sec) → 1st speed

PAGE 6-73
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

D-No.546 Reverse Ramp Up Time [msec] Setting range: 100~5000, Default setting: 500
Sets the time constant for acceleration from zero speed to the maximum reverse rotation speed.
The reverse ramp up time is used in the following cases;
・Manual reverse by turning on (“OFF”→”ON”) the PLC I/O input signal “REVERSE.”
・The reverse ramp up time used in D-No. 002 [Fastening Option]: “Reverse before Fastening.”
・The reverse ramp up time used in D-No. 006 [Fastening Interrupt Operation]: “Reverse Between 1-2 Steps ON.”
・The reverse ramp up time used in D-No. 006 [Fastening Interrupt Operation]: “Reverse Between 2-3 Steps ON.”

D-No.547 CCW Wait Time Between Steps [msec]


Setting range: 0~500, Default setting: 200
Sets the (stopped) waiting time when normal rotation changes to reverse rotation when fastening is
interrupted by a reverse rotation operation.
Note: 200ms is the minimum recommended wait time. Setting lower than this may affect tool life
due to sudden shock generated by high speed motor direction changes.
This is used in the following cases;
・The reverse wait time used in D-No. 002 [Fastening Option]: “Reverse before Fastening.”
・The reverse wait time used in D-No. 006 [Fastening Interrupt Operation]: “Reverse Between 1-2 Steps ON.”
・The reverse wait time used in D-No. 006 [Fastening Interrupt Operation]: “Reverse Between 2-3 Steps ON.”

D-No.548 Option [deg] Setting range: 1 ~ 72


*Not used

D-No.549 Option [deg] Setting range: 1 ~ 100


*Not used

PAGE 6-74
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-6-3 PULSE OPERATION

Recovery Pulse Operation

D-No.005 After Fastening Operation: Recovery Pulse ON Set value: xxxx1x


D-No.550 Recovery Pulsing Count [times] Setting range: 0~50
D-No.551 Recovery Pulsing Speed [rpm] Setting range: within tool speed range
Setting “1” for [Data No. 005 After Fastening Operation] turns ON Recovery Pulse
Operation which will perform refastening for the number of times defined by the recovery
pulsing count (D-No. 550) after fastening to the standard torque (D-No. 103).
Operation speed: Recovery pulsing speed (D-No. 551)

▼Limiting by the current value is applied at the end of fastening.


103: Standard Torque

105: 1st Torque

550: Recovery Pulsing Count 0~50 times


551: Recovery Pulsing Speed [rpm]

【 Note as shown below 】


Caution ● Be sure to set the parameters so that [Pulse Fastening Operation Time] > [Pulse
Fastening Wait Time].
●If the Standard torque is not reached within the operating time, extend the Pulse
Fastening Operation Time until 1ST torque is detected.
If D-No 314 [2nd Time High Limit] is reached before 1ST torque is detected, the
Spindle judgment is a REJECT.

Torque

103:Standard Torque

105:1ST Torque

Time
552: Pulse Fastening Stop/Servo Lock Time

553:Pulse Fastening Wait Time

554: Pulse Fastening Operation Time

PAGE 6-75
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation
Pulse Fastening Operation

D-No.006 Interrupt Operation During Fastening : Pulse Fastening Operation ON


Set value: xxxxx1
Setting “1” for [Data No. 006 Fastening Interrupt Operation] the Pulse Fastening Operation is turned
ON and the pulse fastening operation is performed from the detection of the 1st torque (D-No. 105) to
the detection of the standard torque (D-No. 103).
Operation speed: 1st torque ~ 2nd torque uses 2nd speed (D-No. 403)
2nd torque ~ Standard torque uses 3rd speed (D-No. 404)

103: Standard Torque

109: 2nd Torque


105: 1st Torque

D-No.552 Pulse Fastening Stop Servo Lock Time [msec] Setting range:0~200 Default value:5
Sets the servo lock time between pulses to allow relaxation of the inertial shock caused by stopping.

D-No.553 Pulse Fastening Wait Time [msec] Setting range:0~200 Default value:15
Sets the wait time until rotation is started again (from the point at which fastening is paused).
When the wait time is increased, the fastening time is correspondingly increased.

D-No.554 Pulse Fastening Operation Time [msec] Setting range:0~200 Default value:30
Sets the time required to restart the next pulse from the last stop position. The fastening operation
pauses only when the torque value is reached after the elapse of the pulsing cycle time. A cycle
represents the running time (set at the Pulse Fastening Operation Time) or the fastening up to the set
operation angle. Set the Fastening Pulse Operation Time greater than the Pulse Fastening Wait
time, otherwise the fastening process cannot be completed.

D-No.555 Pulse Fastening Operation Angle [deg] Setting range:0~200 Default value:5
Sets the angle required to restart the next pulse from the last stop position.. The fastening operation
pauses only when the torque value is reached after the elapse of the Pulse Fastening Operation
Angle has been detected. Fastening temporarily stops when it reaches either the Pulse Fastening
Operation Time or the Pulse Fastening Operation Angle.
↑ ▼Completion of fastening
Torque 103: Standard Torque

105: 1st Torque

Time →
552: Pulse Fastening Stop
Servo Lock Time
553: Pulse Fastening Wait Time

554: Pulse Fastening Operation Time

555: Pulse Fastening Operation Angle

PAGE 6-76
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation
6-6-4 GYRO OPERATION

D-No.006 Interrupt Operation During Fastening : Gyro Setup Enable ON Set value: xxxx1x
Setting “1” for [Data No. 006 Interrupt Operation During Fastening] turns ON the Gyro Settings, which
monitors the handle swing during fastening to protect the operator from ergonomic hand ‘twisting’
fatigue. A gyro pause operation is performed after the detection of the 1st torque (D-No. 105) up to
reaching standard torque (D-No. 103).
* This setting is available for a P (pistol) type, T type tool or a D (Driver) type tool
(gyrosensor-incorporated type).
560/570:CW(CCW) Swing Stop Angle

103: Standard Torque

561/571: CW(CCW) Swing Pause Angle


Gyro Detection Angle Origin (0°) Angle

Torque

105: 1st Torque

Time→
Pause▲ ▲Restart ▲Forced End ▲Completion of fastening
563/573: CW(CCW) Swing Motor Resume
Dwell Time
562/572: CW(CCW) Swing Stop Servo Lock Time
D-No.560 CW Swing Stop Angle [deg] Default value: 30
D-No.570 CCW Swing Stop Angle [deg] Default value: 30
Setting range: 0~200
Sets the upper limit angle of tool twist (caused by reaction force), at which point the operation is
stopped(always monitored). (Stops when this limit is exceeded)
(creates a ‘START OFF’ judgment).

D-No.561 CW Swing Pause Angle [deg] Default value: 3


D-No.571 CCW Swing Pause Angle [deg] Default value: 3
Setting range: 0~200
Sets the upper limit angle of tool twist (caused by reaction force), at which point the operation is
paused. (Pauses when this limit is exceeded)
Rotation is started again after the CW/CCW Swing Motor Resume Dwell Time (set as Data No. 563 or
573) has elapsed.
When the operation is paused, the detected angle value from the gyrosensor is reset to 0 degrees.

D-No.562 CW Swing Stop Servo Lock Time [msec] Default value: 5


D-No.572 CCW Swing Stop Servo Lock Time [msec] Default value: 5
Setting range: 0~200
Once the Cw/CCW Swing Pause Angle is reached the fastening is paused, a servo lock is applied for
the set amount of time to allow relaxation of the inertial shock caused by stopping.

D-No.563 CW Swing Motor Resume Dwell Time [msec] Default value: 15


D-No.573 CCW Swing Motor Resume Dwell Time [msec] Default value: 15
Setting range: 0~200
Sets the time until rotation is started again from the point at which fastening is paused.
Ordinarily, this is set to be longer than the Servo Lock Time (however, use is possible even if Servo
Lock Time > Motor Resume Dwell Time).
When the set time is increased, the fastening time is correspondingly increased.

PAGE 6-77
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

6-6-5 SEQUENCE OPERATION

Besides the standard fastening process provided in Parameter 1 ~ 64, two types of sequence operation modes
are provided which, are available for accommodating applications requiring more complex processes.
64 fastening parameters can be used to program up to 8 stages in a fastening sequence.

Batch sequence: Multiple parameter settings are used and at each stage, an operation each requiring a
separate start signal, is repeated for the number of times designated by a “Count.”

Continuous sequence: Up to 8 stages of operation, each with a selectable parameter setting are executed in
order. A single start signal must be sustained and held until the selected sequences are completed.

The designation of a Sequence Operation Mode other than “0: Standard Operation” shall designate the use of a
sequence setting (with Work Select No. = Parameter No.)

[Precautions using the Sequence Operation Mode]


・Start signal input can be via external IO or the start lever of the tool.
・The start signal must be maintained for sequence operation. (Deadman type operation)
・Sequence operation stops immediately with any reject during the sequence cycle.
Caution
・The Accept signal will output only when the sequence operation completes normally.
・Fastening results of each stage are saved. (Result history, Curve history, CF card)
・Spindle cycle count is incremented at the final stage only.
・Curve data is saved as continuous data, except when free-run (speed) occurs.
*The curve data for each stage cannot be read or saved via the HFC3000 user console. The curve
data at the end of sequence is only read/saved (but may include data from a previous stage if
curve range length is setup high enough to include it and “Include Last Curve” is checked in the
curve screen)
(Only the torque-angle curve (540deg fixed length) is saved in the curve history of the CF card.)

D-No.580 Sequence Mode Setting Range: 0~3


0: Standard operation (sequence unavailable)
1: Batch sequence
2: Continuous Sequence 1 (REJECT is not output when the lever is switched off in the middle)
3: Continuous Sequence 2 (REJECT is output when the lever is switched off in the middle)
D-No.581 Sequence Stage 1 [Parameter No./ Count / Dwell Time]
D-No.582 Sequence Stage 2 [Parameter No./ Count / Dwell Time]
D-No.583 Sequence Stage 3 [Parameter No./ Count / Dwell Time]
D-No.584 Sequence Stage 4 [Parameter No./ Count / Dwell Time]
D-No.585 Sequence Stage 5 [Parameter No./ Count / Dwell Time]
D-No.586 Sequence Stage 6 [Parameter No./ Count / Dwell Time]
D-No.587 Sequence Stage 7 [Parameter No./ Count / Dwell Time]
D-No.588 Sequence Stage 8 [Parameter No./ Count / Dwell Time]
Setting ranges: 0~99 (*D-No.581: Parm. 1~64 / Count:0~99 (times) / Dwell:0~99 [×0.1 second])
Default value: 000000 (*D-No.581:XXYYZZ, XX=Parameter No., YY=Count, ZZ=Dwell)

Precautions setting [D-No.581 [Sequence Operation Stage 1]]


・Setting “0” as a parameter No. when any sequence type (1. Batch sequence, 2. Continuous
Caution Sequence 1, or 3. Continuous Sequence 2) has been set, will cause the abnormal signal A.
09-02 “Missing Parameter Setting” to occur after the start signal is input (ON). (The Batch or
Continuous Sequence function requires a parameter number to be set)

PAGE 6-78
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

[1: Batch Sequence]


The parameter No. and count are set for the operation at each stage (the Dwell time is not used).
Example: If the setting is [02. 05. □□], after the fastening operation using parameter 2 is completed
5 times, the next stage is entered (a fastening operation is counted only when the ACCEPT judgment
is made).
If “0” is set as the parameter No. for the stages 2-8, the stage prior becomes the sequence end
position.
When a ‘batch reset’ signal is provided from external I/O, the stage returns to stage 1.

[Precaution on the setup for the batch sequence]


・If “0” is set as the count at any stage, the fastening operation is completed / counted once
Caution
and the operation moves to the next stage.

[2, 3: Continuous Sequence]


Using the continuous sequence setting, [Parameter No. / Dwell Time × 0.1 second] are set (the batch
count is not used).
Example: If the setting is [02. □□. 05], after the fastening operation using parameter 2 is completed,
a time dwell (delay) for 0.5 seconds is performed. The next stage is entered at the completion of the
time dwell. (the start trigger must be (held) depressed through all stages until the end of sequence;
the sequence is interrupted if the start trigger returns (no longer depressed)) during the sequence.
If “0” is set as the parameter No. for stages 2-8, the prior stage becomes the sequence end position
and the judgment would be from the last stage performed.
[Precautions on the result display of D-No.581[Sequence Operation Stage 1]]

Caution
・When using the continuous sequence (2,3 setting), the fastening result parameter:
[Spindle Cycle Count] uses the same count unless the following conditions are
satisfied:
・Sequence operation is completed
・Sequence operation is aborted and terminated

<Program Examples1>
Batch Sequence:
Six digits of data, which designate the parameter No. and the count (number of cycles) required for entering
the next stage, are used in each stage. The count is not incremented unless the fastening result is
ACCEPT.
0 2. 0 4. 0 0
Count
Fastening Parameter No.
Stage D-No. Data Operation PLC I/O Output Signal
BATCH OK BATCH
- 580 1: Batch Batch sequence is selected
(TOTAL-OK) SEQ END
ON after 3rd
1 581 01.03.00 Fastening using parameter 1 (3 times). -
fastening
ON after 4th
2 582 02.04.00 Fastening using parameter 2 (4 times). -
fastening
ON after 1st ON after 1st
3 583 07.01.00 Fastening using parameter 7 (1 time).
fastening fastening
4 584 00.00.00 Batch sequence end. - -
5 585 00.00.00 - - -
6 586 00.00.00 - - -
7 587 00.00.00 - - -
8 588 00.00.00 - - -

PAGE 6-79
Chapter 6 Fastening Operation

<Program Examples2>
Continuous Sequence (Automatic Sequence Function):
Six digits of data, which designate the parameter No. and the dwell time (dwell after fastening) before
entering the next stage, are used in each stage.
01.00.05
The dwell time (in msec) is executed after completion of fastening.
Fastening parameter No.
Stage Data No. Data Operation
2 or (3):
580 The continuous sequence is selected.
Continuous
1 581 01.00.05 Fastening using parameter 1 followed by 0.5 sec. dwell
2 582 02.00.03 Fastening using parameter 2 followed by 0.3 sec. dwell
3 583 03.00.00 Fastening using parameter 3 followed by 0.0 sec. dwell
4 584 00.00.00 Sequence end.
5 585 00.00.00
6 586 00.00.00
7 587 00.00.00
8 588 00.00.00
Parameter No. Operation
1 Fastening 10Nm
2 Loosening operation (angle method, CCW -360 degrees)
3 Fastening 15Nm

*2: In Continuous Sequence 1 mode, if the start trigger is released in the middle of the
sequence, the sequence is ended without judgment (no fastening results are made).
3: In the Continuous Sequence 2 mode, if the start trigger is released in the middle of the
sequence, the sequence is ended with a REJECT judgment.

Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3

PAGE 6-80
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
7

PAGE 7-1
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

7-1 Abnormal State Display


When an abnormal condition is detected by the system, the affected spindle stops and indicates an abnormal
code. For ease of troubleshooting the cause of the abnormal, the system provides an abnormal code in the
[PAR NO] display and an abnormal sub-code in the [D-NO] display.
w Abnormal code display.
When an Abnormal condition occurs, the display mode will automatically change to the STATUS mode
(If the display is not in the STATUS mode, depress the MODE button until a blinking “A” appears in the
[PAR NO] display area). A code number appears at the right side of the blinking character. This code
refers to some specific type of failure detailed in the tables shown in the following sections.
w Abnormal Sub-code display.
The number shown at the most right position in the [D-NO] display area is a sub-code that can be used
in conjunction with the Abnormal failure code to further narrow down the cause of the fault. See the
following sections.

Abnormal Code Abnormal Sub-code

Abnormal No.
Classification of Abnormal Condition
PAR No. Display
A.01 Torque Transducer Error
A.03 Preamplifier Error
A.04 System Memory Error
A.05 Servo Amplifier Reply Error
A.06 Servo Type Error
A.08 Servo Amplifier Error
A.09 Parameter Error

・ If an abnormal condition occurs, the cause must be corrected to ensure safety before
Caution restarting operation.

PAGE 7-2
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

7-2 Abnormal Details / Causes & Recovery Methods


Torque Transducer Errors [A.01 - *]
• Code A01-01 – TORQUE TRANSDUCER / ZERO MASTER ERROR
The System detected a Zero Level Check error during power on initialization.

CAUSE:
• When the tool torque transducer is sensing excessive torque due to pressure on the tool body
during power on initialization (when tool normally should be in an idle state with no external forces
applied)
• The tool cable is disconnected or lost connection during power on.
• If the controller or the tool cable is located in an electric or magnetic noise field.
• When the torque transducer, tool cable or the controller malfunctions.

RECOVERY:
1. Check that the tool has no external force applied to it (IE: anything touching the tool assembly,
misalignment, etc.). Also verify there is no excessive friction in anything connected to the tool
square drive.
2. Verify that no excessive vibration or shock takes place on the tool mounting at power on of the
controller. (Vibration could be sensed by torque transducer)
3. Verify that the tool cable is securely connected at both ends and free from cuts, abrasive wear or
kinks
4. Verify that the tool cable or controller are not located near any high voltage transient power
sources. Relocate as required and reinitialize.
5. Turn control power off to the unit for at least 5 seconds then re-apply power
6. Exchange tool cable, tool and/or controller with known working units. Reinitialize the system after
each exchange to determine which component may have caused the failure (abnormal).
7. Replace the defective component.

• Code A01-02 – TORQUE TRANSDUCER / CAL MASTER ERROR


The System detected a Calibration Voltage Check error during power on initialization.

CAUSE:
1. When the tool torque transducer is sensing excessive torque due to pressure on the tool body
during power on initialization (when tool normally should be in an idle state with no external forces
applied)
2. The tool cable is disconnected or lost connection during power on
3. If the controller or the tool cable is located in an electric or magnetic noise field.
4. When the torque transducer, tool cable or the controller malfunctions.

RECOVERY:
1. Check that the tool has no external force applied to it (IE: anything touching the tool assembly,
misalignment, etc.). Also verify there is no excessive friction in anything connected to the tool
square drive.
2. Verify that no excessive vibration or shock takes place on the tool mounting at power on of the
system. (Vibration could be sensed by torque transducer)
3. Verify that the tool cable is securely connected at both ends and free from cuts, abrasive wear or
kinks
4. Verify that the tool cable or controller are not located near any high voltage transient power
sources. Relocate as required and reinitialize.
5. Turn control power off to the unit for at least 5 seconds then re-apply power
6. Exchange tool cable, tool and/or controller with known working units. Reinitialize the system after
each exchange to determine which component may have caused the failure (abnormal).
7. Replace the defective component.

PAGE 7-3
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

• Code A01-03 - TORQUE TRANSDUCER / ZERO CHECK ERROR


The System detected a Zero Voltage Level Check error after a fastening START was attempted.

CAUSE:
• When the tool torque transducer is sensing excessive torque due to pressure on the tool body
during a START signal to the controller (when tool normally should be in an idle state with no
external forces applied)
• The tool cable is disconnected or lost connection while a START was attempted.
• If the controller or the tool cable is located in an electric or magnetic noise field.
• When the torque transducer, tool cable or the controller malfunctions.

RECOVERY:
1. Check that the tool has no external force applied to it (IE: anything touching the tool assembly,
misalignment, etc.). Also verify there is no excessive friction in anything connected to the tool
square drive.
2. Verify that no excessive vibration or shock takes place on the tool mounting at the same time the
START signal is given to the system. (Vibration could be sensed by torque transducer)
3. Verify that the tool cable is securely connected at both ends and free from cuts, abrasive wear or
kinks
4. Verify that the tool cable or controller are not located near any high voltage transient power
sources. Relocate as required and reinitialize.
5. Turn control power off to the unit for at least 5 seconds then re-apply power
6. Exchange tool cable, tool and/or controller with known working units. Reinitialize the system after
each exchange to determine which component may have caused the failure (abnormal).
7. Replace the defective component.

• Code A01-04 – TORQUE TRANSDUCER / CAL CHECK ERROR


The System detected a Calibration Voltage Check error after a fastening START was attempted

CAUSE:
• When the tool torque transducer is sensing excessive torque due to pressure on the tool body
during a START signal to the controller (when tool normally should be in an idle state with no
external forces applied)
• The tool cable is disconnected or lost connection while a START was attempted.
• If the controller or the tool cable is located in an electric or magnetic noise field.
• When the torque transducer, tool cable or the controller malfunctions.

RECOVERY:
1. Check that the tool has no external force applied to it (IE: anything touching the tool assembly,
misalignment, etc.). Also verify there is no excessive friction in anything connected to the tool
square drive.
2. Verify that no excessive vibration or shock takes place on the tool mounting at the same time the
START signal is given to the system. (Vibration could be sensed by torque transducer)
3. Verify that the tool cable is securely connected at both ends and free from cuts, abrasive wear or
kinks
4. Verify that the tool cable or controller are not located near any high voltage transient power
sources. Relocate as required and reinitialize.
5. Turn control power off to the unit for at least 5 seconds then re-apply power
6. Exchange tool cable, tool and/or controller with known working units. Reinitialize the system after
each exchange to determine which component may have caused the failure (abnormal).
7. Replace the defective component.

PAGE 7-4
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

• Code A01-05 – TORQUE TRANSDUCER / CAL JUDGMENT ERROR


The System detected a Calibration Voltage error after a fastening START was attempted with the
Calibration Check function disabled.

CAUSE:
• When the tool torque transducer is sensing excessive torque due to pressure on the tool body
during a START signal to the controller (when tool normally should be in an idle state with no
external forces applied)
• The tool cable is disconnected or lost connection while a START was attempted.
• If the controller or the tool cable is located in an electric or magnetic noise field.
• When the torque transducer, tool cable or the controller malfunctions.

RECOVERY:
1. Check that the tool has no external force applied to it (IE: anything touching the tool assembly,
misalignment, etc.). Also verify there is no excessive friction in anything connected to the tool
square drive.
2. Verify that no excessive vibration or shock takes place on the tool mounting at the same time the
START signal is given to the system. (Vibration could be sensed by torque transducer)
3. Verify that the tool cable is securely connected at both ends and free from cuts, abrasive wear or
kinks
4. Verify that the tool cable or controller are not located near any high voltage transient power
sources. Relocate as required and reinitialize.
5. Turn control power off to the unit for at least 5 seconds then re-apply power
6. Exchange tool cable, tool and/or controller with known working units. Reinitialize the system after
each exchange to determine which component may have caused the failure (abnormal).
7. Replace the defective component.

• Code A01-06 – TORQUE TRANSDUCER / STARTED ON ZERO ERROR CONDITION


The START signal was input while a Zero Check Abnormal (Code A01_3) condition existed.

RECOVERY:
1. Confirm the PLC logic disables the start signal during an existing abnormal condition or when not
ready. (An abnormal condition must be corrected and RESET before normal operation may
begin)
2. Follow the ZERO CHECK ERROR abnormal help procedure.

• Code A01-07 – TORQUE TRANSDUCER / STARTED ON CAL ERROR CONDITION


The START signal was input while a Cal Check Error (Code A01_4) condition existed.

RECOVERY:
1. Confirm the PLC logic disables the start signal during an existing abnormal condition or when
not ready. (An abnormal condition must be corrected and RESET before normal operation
may begin)
2. Follow the CAL CHECK ERROR abnormal help procedure.

PAGE 7-5
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

Preamplifier Errors [A.03 - *]


• Code A03-01 - PREAMPLIFIER / TOOL ID DATA ERROR
Data checksum error between the torque transducer preamplifier and the HFC Controller. Tool ID
Data is not reliable due to data error.

CAUSE:
1. The tool cable has lost connection during data transmission.
2. If the controller or the tool cable is located in an electric or magnetic noise field.
3. When the torque transducer, tool cable or the controller malfunctions.
4. The TOOL ID data is corrupt or has been lost due to cable being disconnected with power on

RECOVERY:
1. Verify that the cable or controller are not located near any high voltage transient power sources.
Relocate as required and reinitialize the system.
2. Turn control power off to the unit for at least 5 second then re-start.
3. Exchange tool cable, tool and/or controller with known working units. Reinitialize the system after
each exchange to determine which component may have caused the failure (abnormal).
4. Replace the defective component.
5. If TOOL ID data is missing or corrupt, replace tool and return to FEC to be re-programmed
(to see TOOL ID Data, use HFC3000 software to upload TOOL ID data and view contents “Details”
– if any data is blank or missing, data may have been lost)

• Code A03-02 - PREAMPLIFIER / TOOL TYPE ERROR


The connected tool type (Shown in System Parameter 100) does not match the tool type
programmed into the controller (Shown in System Parameter 200). This error may occur when
controllers or tools are replaced with the wrong type unit or the parameter program does not match
the tool size installed.

RECOVERY:
1. Verify the tool size (model number) matches the tool programmed in the controller parameter.
2. Program proper tool number into the controller (HFC) unit or change tool to proper tool.
3. Confirm TOOL ID data has not been corrupted or is missing – Reprogram TOOL ID or exchange
with new tool

• Code A03-03 - PREAMPLIFIER / TOOL IS NOT CONNECTED


• Code A03-04 - PREAMPLIFIER / TOOL COMMUNICATION ERROR
Communications error between the tool preamplifier (torque transducer) and the controller.

CAUSE:
1. The tool cable is not connected or has lost connection during communication.
2. If the controller or the transducer cable is located in an electric or magnetic noise field causing the
Tool ID not to be read correctly.
3. When the torque transducer, transducer cable or the controller malfunctions.

RECOVERY:
1. Verify that the tool cable is securely connected at both ends and free from cuts, abrasive wear or
kinks
2. Verify that excessive strain is not being applied to the tool connector or cable while running.
3. Verify that the cable or controller are not located near any high voltage transient power sources.
Relocate as required and reinitialize the system.
4. Turn control power off to the unit for at least 5 seconds then re-start.
5. Confirm TOOL ID data has not been corrupted or is missing
6. Exchange tool cable, tool and/or controller with known working units. Reinitialize the system after
each exchange to determine which component may have caused the failure (abnormal).
7. Replace the defective component.

PAGE 7-6
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

• Code A03-05 - PREAMPLIFIER / WATCHDOG TIMER ERROR


Communications error between the tool preamplifier (torque transducer) and the controller.

CAUSE:
1. The tool cable is not connected or has lost connection during communication.
2. When the torque transducer, transducer cable or the controller malfunctions.

RECOVERY:
1. Verify that the tool cable is securely connected at both ends and free from cuts, abrasive wear or
kinks
2. Turn control power off to the unit for at least 5 minutes then re-start.
3. Exchange tool cable, tool and/or controller with known working units. Reinitialize the system after
each exchange to determine which component may have caused the failure (abnormal).
Replace the defective component

System Memory Errors [A.04 - *]


• Code A04-01 - SYSTEM MEMORY ERROR / FLASH ROM WRITE ERROR
Communications error to internal HFC Unit Flash ROM during a WRITE attempt.

CAUSE:
1. If the controller is located in an electric or magnetic noise field.
2. Flash ROM IC chip has malfunctioned.

RECOVERY:
1. Verify that the controller is not located near any high voltage transient power sources. Relocate as
required and reinitialize the system.
2. Turn control power off to the unit for at least 5 minutes then re-apply power.
3. Replace controller.

• Code A04-02 - SYSTEM MEMORY ERROR / FLASH ROM READ ERROR


Communications error to internal HFC Unit Flash ROM during a READ attempt.

CAUSE:
1. Corrupt memory data in the fieldbus configuration area
2. If the controller is located in an electric or magnetic noise field.
3. Flash ROM IC chip has malfunctioned.

RECOVERY:
1. If fieldbus interface is used, configure and download fieldbus configuration. Cycle Power.
2. Verify that the controller is not located near any high voltage transient power sources. Relocate as
required and reinitialize the system.
3. Turn control power off to the unit for at least 5 minutes then re-apply power.
4. Replace controller.

• Code A04-03 - SYSTEM MEMORY ERROR / SERVO AMP FLASH ROM ERROR
Communications error to internal HFC Unit Servo Amp flash ROM.

CAUSE:
1. If the controller is located in an electric or magnetic noise field.
2. Flash ROM IC chip has malfunctioned.

RECOVERY:
1. Verify that the controller is not located near any high voltage transient power sources. Relocate as
required and reinitialize the system.
2. Turn control power off to the unit for at least 5 minutes then re-apply power.
3. Replace controller.

PAGE 7-7
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

• Code A04-04 - SYSTEM MEMORY ERROR / STORED DATA WRITE ERROR


An error occurred during a WRITE attempt to SDRAM saved data.

CAUSE:
1. If the controller is located in an electric or magnetic noise field.
2. SDRAM chip has malfunctioned.

RECOVERY:
1. Verify that the controller is not located near any high voltage transient power sources. Relocate as
required and reinitialize the system.
2. Turn control power off to the unit for at least 5 minutes then re-apply power.
3. Replace controller.

• Code A04-05 - SYSTEM MEMORY ERROR / STORED DATA READ ERROR


An error occured during a READ attempt from SDRAM saved data.

CAUSE:
1. If the controller is located in an electric or magnetic noise field.
2. SDRAM chip has malfunctioned.

RECOVERY:
1. Verify that the controller is not located near any high voltage transient power sources. Relocate as
required and reinitialize the system.
2. Turn control power off to the unit for at least 5 minutes then re-apply power.
3. Replace controller.

• Code A04-06 - SYSTEM MEMORY ERROR / RTC WRITE ERROR


An error occurred during a WRITE attempt to the Real-time Clock chip.

CAUSE:
1. If the controller is located in an electric or magnetic noise field.
2. RTC chip has malfunctioned.

RECOVERY:
1. Verify that the controller is not located near any high voltage transient power sources. Relocate as
required and reinitialize the system.
2. Turn control power off to the unit for at least 5 minutes then re-apply power.
3. Replace controller.

• Code A04-07 - SYSTEM MEMORY ERROR / RTC READ ERROR


An error occurred during a READ attempt from the Real-time Clock chip.

CAUSE:
1. If the controller is located in an electric or magnetic noise field.
2. RTC chip has malfunctioned.

RECOVERY:
1. Verify that the controller is not located near any high voltage transient power sources. Relocate as
required and reinitialize the system.
2. Turn control power off to the unit for at least 5 minutes then re-apply power.
3. Replace controller.

PAGE 7-8
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

Servo Amplifier Reply Errors [A.05 - *]


• Code A05-01 - SERVO AMPLIFIER REPLY ERROR / NO REPLY FROM RESOLVER
The controller is attempting to turn the motor but is not receiving any signals back from the resolver to
indicate that the tool is actually turning or the speed reference on the amplifier is not responding.

CAUSE:
1. The tool cable is damaged or not connected.
2. When the resolver, motor or the controller malfunctions.
3. If there is excessive binding in the fastener, transmission or the spindle assembly keeping the
motor from turning.
4. System Parameter #523 (Fastening Current Limit) is not set to the correct value or set to 0% (may
be set too low).
5. Torque Transducer damage/error will not allow motor to start/turn.

RECOVERY:
1. Verify that the tool cable is securely connected at both ends and free from cuts, abrasive wear or
kinks
2. Connect a known good spare tool cable to the existing tool.
3. Exchange tool and/or controller with known working units. Reinitialize the system after exchanges.
4. Verify that System Parameter #523 [Fastening Current Limit] is set to the correct default value. (A
lower value than the default value will limit the current output of the controller to the value
programmed)
5. Inspect and correct any binding in the spindle assembly, transmission or fasteners.

PAGE 7-9
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

Servo Amplifier Type Errors [A.06 - *]


• Code A06-01 - SERVO TYPE ERROR / SERVO TYPE MISMATCH
The connected tool type (Shown in System (SYS) Parameter D-No. 100) does not match the tool type
programmed into the controller (Shown in Parameter D-No. 200). This error may occur when
controllers or tools are replaced with the wrong type unit or the parameter program does not match
the tool size installed.

RECOVERY:
4. Verify the tool size (model number) matches the tool programmed in the controller parameter.
5. Program proper tool number into the controller (HFC) unit or change tool to proper tool.
6. Confirm TOOL ID data has not been corrupted or is missing – Reprogram TOOL ID or exchange
with new tool

Servo Amplifier Errors [A.08 - *]


• Code A08-01 - SERVO AMPLIFIER ERROR / SERVO HAS OVER HEATED
The HFC controller servo thermal sensor has detected an overheat condition.

CAUSE:
1. If the environmental temperature is more than 113 degrees Fahrenheit (45 degree centigrade)
without any air flow or cooling unit
2. Source voltage is very close to the limit (253 VAC) and the environment temperature is also close
to 113 degrees F.
3. Maximum torque or duty cycle is being run or exceeded by the tool every cycle. (Duty can not be
more than 60% - time running/overall cycle time)

RECOVERY:
1. Replace the controller.
2. Provide additional cooling to the enclosure.
3. Verify and correct the source voltage as required.
4. Turn control power off to the unit for at least 5 minutes then re-apply power.
5. Verify proper torque or work piece.

• Code A08-02 - SERVO AMPLIFIER ERROR / WATCHDOG TIMER ABNORMAL


The HFC controller watchdog timer is not functioning properly.

CAUSE:
1. The controller watch dog circuit has malfunctioned or failed.

RECOVERY:
1. Turn control power off to the unit for at least 5 seconds then re-apply power.
2. Replace the controller.

PAGE 7-10
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

• Code A08-04 - SERVO AMPLIFIER ERROR / OVER CURRENT


The HFC controller servo circuit experienced a current overload.

CAUSE:
1. The fastener rundown speed may be set too high and creating high current spikes when it tries to
ramp down to a slower speed or as the fastener is seated to the work piece.
2. Damage to the motor power wiring of the tool cable causing a short circuit.
3. Damage to the resolver wiring of the tool cable resulting in the servo amplifier loosing control of the
motor because the signal feedback is incorrect.

RECOVERY:
1. Reduce fastener rundown speed or reduce the difference between the fastener rundown speed
and ramp down speed.
2. Verify that rundown revolutions is not set too high.
3. Verify that the cable is not damaged. Replace if necessary.

• Code A08-05 - SERVO AMPLIFIER ERROR / OVER VOLTAGE ABNORMAL


The HFC controller servo power supply circuit is not working properly or the input voltage is above the
maximum limit.

CAUSE:
1. The controller internal power supply has failed.
2. Source voltage is very close to the limit (253 VAC).
3. Internal regenerative voltage surge caused by motor ramp down.

RECOVERY:
1. Replace the controller.
2. Verify and correct the source voltage as required.
3. Reduce fastener rundown speed or reduce the difference between the fastener rundown speed
and ramp down speed.
4. Verify that rundown revolutions is not set too high (causing fastener to ‘slam’ into part before
slowing down)
5. Verify that the cable is not damaged. Replace if necessary.

• Code A08-07 - SERVO AMPLIFIER ERROR / CONTROL POWER INTERRUPT ABNORMAL


The HFC controller control power circuit has detected input voltage below 18V.

CAUSE:
1. The control power supply (24VDC) does not have enough capacity.

RECOVERY:
1. Confirm power supply wiring
2. Change control power supply to a larger size.

• Code A08-08 - SERVO AMPLIFIER ERROR / SYSTEM ERROR.


Internal malfunction of the controller

CAUSE:
1. The controller has failed.

RECOVERY:
1. Power down controller for 5 minutes and power up.
2. If abnormal continues, replace the controller.

PAGE 7-11
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

• Code A08-10 - SERVO AMPLIFIER ERROR / OVER LOAD (I SQUARE T)


The servo amplifier has detected that the motor has drawn too much current over a predefined period
and has over loaded.

CAUSE:
1. The duty cycle of the fastening application is too severe for this size of tool or for the parameters
currently set up.
2. The servo amplifier is not getting proper feedback from the resolver and supplying extra current to
the motor.

RECOVERY:
1. Reduce duty cycle - Increase tool “downtime or off time” and/or increase 1st,2nd and 3rd Speeds to
reduce the amount of time running at high torque/slow speed.
2. Increase the Ramp Down Start Torque, 1st Torque or 2nd Torque at which 1st Speed shifts to 2nd
Speed.
3. If using Torque Recovery, try decreasing the recovery time.
4. Check the fastening joint. If it is a soft joint (increased angular turn) increase 1 st Torque and/or
2nd Torque and speeds to keep motor from running slow (under load) for long durations
5. Check the cable connections.
6. If the problem remains, a larger tool assembly may be required for this application. Please contact
FEC.

• Code A08-11 - SERVO AMPLIFIER ERROR / RESOLVER SIGNAL ERROR


The resolver signal received from the tool in the controller is not correct.

RECOVERY:
1. Verify that the tool cable is securely connected at both ends and free from cuts, abrasive wear or
kinks. Replace tool cable with known good spare cable.
2. Confirm tool duty is below 60% and/or motor temp is below 70 degree C (158degree F)
3. Replace the tool.
4. Replace the controller

• Code A08-12 - SERVO AMPLIFIER ERROR / SYSTEM ERROR


An internal system error has occurred.

RECOVERY:
1. Replace the controller.

• Code A08-14 - SERVO AMPLIFIER ERROR / MOTOR PARAMETER ERROR


The internal motor parameters in the MFC Unit are abnormal or not correct for the tool.

RECOVERY:
1. Replace the controller.

• Code A08-15 - SERVO AMPLIFIER ERROR / SYSTEM ERROR


An internal system error has occured.

RECOVERY:
1. Replace the controller.

PAGE 7-12
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

• Code A08-16 - SERVO AMPLIFIER ERROR / MOTOR DRIVE POWER VOLTAGE ERROR
The AC input power to the HFC Unit is disconnected or was turned off during fastening.

CAUSE:
1. The controller internal power supply has failed.
2. The input power cable is not connected or is damaged.
3. Source voltage is out of the limit (100-253 VAC).
4. A supply power failure occurred

RECOVERY:
1. Verify that the input power cable is connected and not damaged.
2. Verify and correct the source voltage as required (on all three phases)
3. Replace the controller.

• Code A08-17 - SERVO AMPLIFIER ERROR / SYSTEM CPU ERR


The controller has detected a failure of the Servo CPU

CAUSE:
1. The Servo CPU has failed

RECOVERY:
1. Replace the controller

• Code A08-20 - SERVO AMPLIFIER ERROR / CURRENT SENSOR ERROR


The controller has detected a failure of the Servo Current Sensor

CAUSE:
1. The Servo Current Sensor has failed.

RECOVERY:
1. Replace the controller

PAGE 7-13
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

Parameter Errors [A.09 - *]


• Code A09-02- PARAMETER ERROR / MISSING PARAMETER SETUP
Some parameter settings are missing, set to “0” or out of the specified range of the tool.

RECOVERY:
1. Check that the parameter presets are not set as <0> or out of the specified range of the tool.
Confirm and set the affected value(s) in the acceptable range

100: Calibration Torque


102: Peak Torque High Limit
103: Target Torque (when Fastening Method is Torque Control)
202: Target Angle (when Fastening Method is Angle Control)
312: 1st Time High Limit
314: 2nd Time Tigh Limit
581: Using Sequence Operation Mode & Sequence Stage1 = 000000
SYS-036 = 1 & Fastening Direction is CCW
SYS-036 = 2 & Fastening Direction is CW

• Code A09-08 - PARAMETER ERROR / REVERSE TORQUE OVER.


The torque value exceeds the Reverse Torque High Limit value during a reverse operation.

RECOVERY:
1. Verify that the programmed parameter value is correct. Default [D-No. 110] value (5Nm) may be
too low
2. If the value is correct, check the application. The size of the tool may not be adequate for this
application or the fastener being reversed may be over-torqued.
3. Verify there is no excessive binding in the fastener, transmission or end of tool square drive
keeping the motor from turning.

• Code A09-09 - PARAMETER ERROR / SPINDLE NUMBER SETTING ERROR.


The spindle address of the HFC Unit has been set to something other than “1”.

RECOVERY:
1. Set the HFC Unit Address rotary switch located on the bottom of controller to “1”.

• Code A09-10 - PARAMETER ERROR / ANGLE HEAD TORQUE VARIATION ERROR.


The torque variation od the angle head exceeded the D-No. 541 Angle Head Variation Rate

CAUSE:
1. The tool angle head may have degraded operation.
RECOVERY:
1. Change the setting of D-No. 541 to “0” or “100” (percent)
2. Change the setting of D-No. 006 from “xxx1xx” to xxx0xx”
3. Replace the Angle Head

• Code A09-13 - PARAMETER ERROR / WORK SELECTION ERROR.


The Work/Parameter number selected is invalid (when trying to Start or Reverse)

RECOVERY:
1. Check the setting of SYS parameter D-No. 411 is using the correct method that will change
the work/parameter number.
2. If the SYS parameter D-No. 411 is set to “ID Input” (work selected from RS232C or Fieldbus
message) and the received part ID does not match with the model selection setup data or the
part ID has not been received after the part ID memory is cleared, this error will occur. Confirm
data and model select data setup.

PAGE 7-14
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

7-3. Spindle Judgment: Checking REJECT Reason


When a value falling outside the high and low limit range (Lower than the low limit or higher than the
high limit value) of a fastening parameter is detected during a fastening operation, the REJECT
judgment is made and the NG LED of the controller lights up red.
The reason for stopping that was detected first can be confirmed from the display.

●Confirmation of the Fastening Parameter


Procedure 1. After the end of fastening, “r.**” is indicated on the WORK Display of controller display
as shown in the figure above, with the numeral indicated at “**” being the parameter No. of
the last parameter used during operation (the parameter No. will not be updated unless a
fastening operation is performed).

●Confirmation of the Reason for Fastening Stoppage


Procedure 1. After the end of fastening, press the “▲” and “▼” buttons to select COUNT/D-No.: “09.”
The reason for the fastening stopping is indicated in the upper part of the display.
Procedure 2. If “REJECT” is indicated, the D-No. of the parameter set value for which the stop occurred
first is indicated at the COUNT/D-No. “10” as shown in the drawing above. Also, for each
item which a fastening REJECT (failure) is detected, “H/L” is indicated at the top digit of the
upper stage of the indicator indicating High or Low limit reject.

PAGE 7-15
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

7-4. Ethernet Communication


If Ethernet communication of the HFC Software cannot be performed with the PC being used, please
refer to the following troubleshooting table.

Item Countermeasures/Check Details PAGE


Is there an error in the TCP/IP Section
Check the TCP/IP setup procedures.
setting procedures? 4-8
・ If the PC and the controller are to be
connected without an ethernet switch/
hub, try using a crossover ethernet
cable.
Is there any problem with the Section
・ If connection is to be made with an
PC communication cable? 4-8
ethernet switch/hub, use a (Standard)
straight etherent cable.
・ Select a LAN cable of category 5e or
higher.
Is network connection enabled
・ Set up the PC to enable network
in the PC to be used for -
connection or check with another PC.
Ethernet communication?
・ The PC’s ethernet setting can be
Confirm by Command Prompt
confirmed by Command Prompt Next page
functions
functions.
Is PC connected with a wired LAN
and wireless LAN from the PC at ・Disconnect the wireless LAN.
the same time?
If data is not output correctly even though there are no problems with communication, please refer to
the following table.

Item Countermeasures/Check Details PAGE


・ Confirm that the protocol by which the
data output is to be performed is Next page
correctly set.
Data is not output at all ・ If the START signal is turned OFF
before 1ST torque or 1ST angle is
detected after starting tightening
operation, data will not be output.

PAGE 7-16
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

●Method for Confirming Using Command Prompt Functions (Windows 7)


1. Connect the controller and the PC with the PC communication cable.
2. In the Windows Start menu, click “All Programs” → “Accessories”
→ “Command Prompt.” (Or search “Command Prompt” using search function)

3. When the command prompt screen appears, enter “ipconfig” and then press the Enter key. The
current PC settings are displayed. If the displayed settings (IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default
Gateway) are not correct, set the PC’s setting again.

4. If a normal response is made as in the screen above and yet connection with the HFC3000 User
Console fails, make the command prompt screen appear again and then enter “ping
192.168.3.199” or “ping 192.168.3.198.” (* Enter the IP address of the controller and the PC after
ping command)
The following will be displayed if normal communication between the controller and the PC is
enabled. (if there is no ping response, then the IP address setup needs to be re-checked /
confirmed)
In the case of normal
communication

PAGE 7-17
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

7-5. RTC (Real Time Clock setup)


The HFC3000 controller is equipped with a RTC (real time clock) for holding date and time data.
・Model ANG-RTC
・Backup power source Before June 2016: Backup by electric double layer capacitor
July 2016 and after: Lithium Battery
Backup duration in power OFF state Approx. 1000 hours
Power ON time needed for full charging of clock unit 1 hour
With a spare controller, etc., be careful because the time setting inside a controller will be cleared if
the control power of the controller is not turned on for 2 months or more.

Please perform time adjustment periodically as the clock loses time at a


Caution
rate of approximately 10 minutes a month.

●Procedures for Changing the Date/Time of a controller (display)

1. Press and hold the PROGRAM switch of the controller. (to enter program mode)
2. Depress the arrow buttons so “SYS” is indicated in the Work No. Display and “019” or “20” (“RTC:
Year/Month/Day (Time)”) is indicated in the COUNT/D-No. Display and then press the [SET] switch.
3. After transitioning to the set / editing mode, depress the arrow buttons to change to the desired date or
time (“▲”, “▼”: for incrementing/decrementing the value; “◄“, “►”: for moving the cursor).
4. Press the [SET] button, and within 2 seconds, press the “▲” or “▼” button to change “NO” to “YES,”
and then press the [SET] button again.
5. Press and hold the PROGRAM button of the controller. (exit program mode)

4
[▲]
[SET]
or
[▼]
Change
Date/Time Setting

* Besides the method of setting dtae/time from the controller display, synchronization with the date/time
of a connected PC can be performed from the “Date/Time Setting” window of the HFC3000 User
Console software.

PAGE 7-18
Chapter 8 Options

8
Chapter 8 Options

PAGE 8-1
Chapter 8 Options

8-1 Compact Flash (CF) Card


8-1-1 Summary
Fastening results and fastening curves can be stored as files in a Compact Flash (CF) card
(hereinafter, “memory card”). The stored data can be confirmed later by reading with a PC.

・ If an unused memory card or a memory card used in another device is to be


used, it must be formatting before using it.
Caution

●Operation-Confirmed Memory Cards


Please select a memory card of 32GB or less with reference to the following table.
Series Manufacturer Model
UltraCompactFlash SanDisk SDCFHG-004G-J95
Platinum II Lexar LCF8GBBCJP200
CF115 I-O DATA CF115-1G
●List of Number of Storable Data Sets According to Capacity
・Storage data format: Fastening results + Fastening curves (180 degrees: torque vs. angle)
Storage
Number of Stored Data Sets
Capacity
4GB approx. 900 thousand sets
8GB approx. 1.8 million sets
16GB approx. 3.4 million sets
32GB approx. 7.0 million sets

[Precautions Concerning Memory Card Usage]


・Care must be taken as the data stored in a memory card may be erased under the
following conditions.
♦When a user handles a memory card incorrectly.
♦When a memory card is used or stored in an environment with static electricity or
electrical noise.
♦When a memory card sits idle/ is not used for a long period of time.
・A memory card has a limited lifetime and the stored data may become unreadable if
Caution the card is not used for a long period of time. Be sure to back up the necessary
data in a PC, etc., periodically.
・Avoid use and storage in a location with sudden temperature change, a location
where condensation occurs, or a location exposed to direct sunlight.
・Do not bend or apply a strong shock to the memory card. Also, do not subject the
memory card to water or place it in a location of high temperature.

PAGE 8-2
Chapter 8 Options

8-1-2 Selection Criteria


●specification
・Data transfer method.:PIO Max 8.3MHz/byte *Initial CF card transfer standard。
・Capacity :32GB or less
・Operating environment:0°~ 45°
・Function:With write distribution function
・FAT12、FAT16、FAT32 Format

8-1-3 CF Access LED

Name Color States


Off Completed data save
Saving data
Green
Formatting in progress
The storable capacity of the CF card falls to less than 200MB
CF Orange *1
(Capacity is 1 to 10% before Controller software version V1.209)
ACCESS
CF card is not inserted
LED
Failed to save data
Red *2 Format failed
The storable capacity of the CF card falls to less than 20MB
(Capacity is 1% or less before Controller Software Version V1.209)
*1: if a ”CF Card Formatting” is executed, the LED will turn off
*2: LED continues to light until the controller power is turned off/on again

PAGE 8-3
Chapter 8 Options

8-1-4 Storing Data in the CF Memory Card


1. Insert the CF card in the CF card slot (with the controller power OFF)

・ When the control power is turned ON with the CF card installed in the slot,
more time is required for the controller to become operable because a file
Caution storage folder is generated in the CF card.

・Insert the CF card slowly and with its top surface to the left side. Although
the card cannot be inserted in the opposite orientation, a malfunction of the
Caution controller or the CF card may occur if the card is forcibly pressed in.

2. Data storage is executed after the fastening operation has ended (once the CF data storage is
enabled)

・ Do not remove the card from the slot or turn OFF the control power while
data storage is in progress or damage may occur to the CF card and/or data
Caution may become damaged.

3. When data is being stored in the CF card, the CF ACCESS LED is lit in green.
If storage in the CF card fails, the CF ACCESS LED lights up red.

CF ACCESS
Green: Data storage in progress.
Red: Data storage failed.

PAGE 8-4
Chapter 8 Options
8-1-5 Data Storage Flow
The fastening results and the fastening curves are stored in the memory card.
The fastening results are stored according to date in the TSV format and can be displayed in
Microsoft® Excel®.
In regard to the fastening curves, the torque vs. angle (180deg) curve of is stored in the “nracd”
format, which is dedicated for use with the HFC3000 User Console.
The fastening curve displayed on the “Curve Monitor” of the HFC3000 User Console can be stored
in a TSV format.
Please refer the <<HFC3000 User Console Instruction Manual>> concerning curve display using
the HFC software.

● Fastening Results
The fastening results are stored in the “RESULT” folder, which is generated automatically. Inside
the “RESULT” folder, folders, each with a name expressing the year and month, such as “201309,”
are generated automatically and a folder is automatically generated in the manner of “201310,”
“201311,” “201312,” etc., at each turn of the month or year.
Inside the “201309” folder, the following file is stored at the end of the fastening operation.

RESULT/YYYYMM/YYYYMMDD.TSV (TSV format file)


Year/Month Year/Month/Day
The fastening results for a single day are stored in each file. When the date changes, a new file is
automatically generated in the same folder.

Automatically Automatically
generated generated

Automatically
generated

PAGE 8-5
Chapter 8 Options

●Storage of Fastening Curves


Fastening curves are stored in the automatically-generated folder “CURVE.”
Inside the “CURVE” folder, folders, each with a name expressing the year and month, such as
“201309,” are generated automatically, and a folder is automatically generated in the manner of
“201310,” “201311,” “201312,” etc., at each turn of the month or year.
Inside the “201309” folder, folders, each with a name expressing the year, month, and day, such
as “20130901,” are generated automatically, and a folder is automatically generated in the manner
of “20130902,” “20130903,” “20130904,” etc., as the date changes.
Inside the “20130901” folder, folders, each with its name being the time of the fastening curve
that is saved first, are generated automatically in the manner of “123456~,” “123616~,” etc.
Inside the “123456~” folder, the following file is stored at the end of the fastening operation.

CURVE/YYYYMM/YYYYMMDD/hhmmss~/YYYYMMDD_hhmmss.nracd (nracd format)


Year/Month Year/Month/ Hour/ Year/Month/ Hour/
Day Minute/ Day Minute/
Second Second
40 sets of fastening curves are stored in each file. When 40 sets of fastening curves have been
stored, the next file is generated automatically inside the “20130901” folder.
Also, besides the fastening curves, “index.txt” for folder identification is generated inside
“CURVE.” The contents of index.txt are erased each time a folder is generated automatically.


CURVE 201309 20130901 123456∼ 20130901_123456.nracd
Every 40
40件毎に
自動生成
Automatically 自動生成
Automatically 自動生成
Automatically 自動生成
Automatically files are
generated generated generated generated 20130901_123526.nracd フォルダin
grouped
aで区切る
folder.
20130901_123556.nracd


123616∼ 20130901_123616.nracd
Every
40件毎に 40
自動生成
Automatically
20130901_123636.nracd files are
generated フォルダ
・・・

grouped in
aで区切る
folder.
20130901_123656.nracd


20130902 123456∼ 20130902_123456.nracd
Every 40
40件毎に
自動生成
Automatically 自動生成
Automatically files are
generated generated 20130902_123526.nracd フォルダ
grouped in
・・・

・・・

aで区切る
folder.
20130902_123556.nracd


201310 20131001 123456∼ 20131001_123456.nracd
Every 40
40件毎に
自動生成
Automatically 自動生成
Automatically 自動生成
Automatically files are
generated generated generated 20131001_123526.nracd フォルダ
grouped in
・・・

aで区切る
folder.
20131001_123556.nracd
index.txt
自動生成
Automatically
generated

・Do not modify the contents of the “index.txt” file.


Caution
The curve files will not be stored correctly.

PAGE 8-6
Chapter 8 Options

8-1-6 Checking the Capacity of the CF Card

When the remaining capacity of the memory card falls to no more than 1%, the CF ACCESS LED
lights (orange). The storage capacity of the memory card can be checked from the controller
display.
●Procedures for Confirming the Storage Capacity of the Memory Card

1. The controller must be in a state (Bypass) where it cannot be started by external control will not be
running. (The READY signal should be is “ON.”)
2. Use the “◄” and “►” buttons on the controller display until the System Setting Mode is indicated as
[SYS].
3. Use the “▲” and “▼” buttons on the controller until “400” is indicated at the COUNT/D-No. Display.

4. The value indicated at the upper stage of the display is the storable capacity (units: MB) of the CF
memory card. (For firmware version 1.209 or earlier: (Units: %))

・ When the CF ACCESS LED lights RED, storage into the memory card is
discontinued to prevent mismatch of the stored contents of the fastening
Caution results and the fastening curves.

CF ACCESS
(Controller firmware version V1.209 or later)
Orange: Storage capacity is no more than 200MB
Red: Storage capacity is no more than 20MB
(Controller firmware version V1.209 or earlier)
Orange: Storage capacity is 1% or less
Red: Storage capacity is 0.1% or less

PAGE 8-7
Chapter 8 Options

8-1-7 Formatting the CF Memory Card


All data stored in the memory card can be erased by re-formatting.

Do not extract the memory card during formatting or the card may become
damaged / incapable of use.
Caution

●CF Memory Card Formatting Procedure


Procedure 1. Insert the memory card in the CF Card slot of the controller with the controller power
OFF.

Procedure 2. Use the “◄” and “►” buttons on the controller display until the System Setting Mode is
indicated as [SYS]. Use the “▲” and “▼” buttons on the controller until “021” is
indicated at the COUNT/D-No. Display
Procedure 3. Hold the PROGRAM button on the controller Front Panel (to put the controller in the
BYPASS mode) and then press the [SET] button.
Procedure 4. Press the “▲” or “▼” buttons to select “CF” in the upper part of the display as the type
of data to be erased and then press the [SET] button.
Procedure 5. Within 2 seconds, press the“▲” and “▼” buttons to change “Erase NO” to “Erase YES”
and within 2 seconds thereafter, press the [SET] button.
Procedure 6. When the formatting is started, “Erase” at the upper part of the display flashes and the
ACCESS LED lights green. If the formatting fails, the ACCESS LED lights red.

[SET] [ ] or [ ] [SET]

Memory Card
Formatting

Canceled if not operated for 2 seconds.

CF ACCESS
Green: Formatting in progress.
Red: Formatting failed.

PAGE 8-8
Chapter 8 Options

8-2 Expansion RS232C Interface


With the expansion RS232C interface, input of ID data can be performed. The ID data that has been
input by the RS232 Input port is “married” to the curve waveform and fastening result data and output
as result data or the fieldbus message, etc.

Pin No. Signal IN/OUT Contents


1 N.C. - Not used
2 RxD IN ID data input
3 TxD OUT Not used
4 DTR OUT Always ON output
5 GND - Signal ground
6 N.C. - Not used
7 RTS OUT Always ON output
8 N.C. - Not used
9 N.C. - Not used

・The RS232C-2 port is for input of ID data only.


Set SYS. 033: 1XXXXX ID Input Selection to “RS232C-2.”
Caution

The factory settings of the RS232C-2 ports of the Expansion controller 2 are shown below. The
respective set values can be confirmed with D-No. “401” ~ “404” of the System Setting Mode (PAR No.
Display: “SYS”)
The settings cannot be changed using the front panel display. The settings can be changed using HFC
Software ver. 1.130 or later.
●Factory default setting ([SYS] System Parameters)

D-No.401
“RS232C-2: Communication 38400bps
Speed”
D-No.402
None
“RS232C-2: Parity”
D-No.403
2 bits
“RS232C-2: Stop bit”
D-No. 404
8 bits
“RS232C-2: Data Length”
●Expansion RS232C Specifications

Synchronization Start-stop synchronization Communication 9600bps/19200bps/


Method method Speed 38400bps
Communication
Half-duplex system Start Bit 1 bit
Mode
Data length 7 bits/8 bits Stop Bit 1 bit/2bits
Error control None Parity odd/even/none

PAGE 8-9
Chapter 8 Options

8-3 ID Data Input Setting


When the ID data (Part, VIN, Model No., etc.) is input before the fastening operation, the input data
is added to the fastening results and output to the HFC3000 User Console, the standard RS232C
port, and the fieldbus message data.
The selected data input method can be either by a supporting fieldbus interface (by messaging) or
the RS232C-2 serial port.
(Simultaneous input via fieldbus and the RS232C cannot be performed.)

[Precautions on ID Data Input]


・Use of ASCII code data from "0x20" to "0x7E” is possible except for the following;
"0x22", "0x27", "0x2A", "0x2F", "0x3A", "0x3C", "0x3E", "0x3F", "0x5C", "0x7C"
If other characters than above are used, there is a possibility data display is garbled or
unreadable.
・Maximum data size: Up to 32 characters(32 Byte).
If a value more than 32 bytes is sent, only the first 32 bytes are used.
・All ID data received before the fastening operation will be used (up to 32 bytes)
Caution
・Complete the data transfer before the fastening operation.
・If the ID data is input during fastening operation, it will not be accepted.
・The ID data contents are held until input of the next ID data.
・If the ID data is input after fastening operation, the ID data is overwritten.

PAGE 8-10
Chapter 8 Options

When the expansion RS232C is selected as the data input method and “Add STX/ETX” is set to be
used, the ID data can be cleared when the STX signal is received via the RS232C-2 and data will be
updated by the input data when the ETX signal is received. The STX/ETX data will be excluded in the
stored data (not be output as well)
● ID Data Output Timing ("A" in the figure requires an input time of 100msec)
・Example 1:the ID data is input continuously before the fastening operation

・Example 2:the ID data is input during the fastening operation

・Example 3:the ID data is not re-entered.

PAGE 8-11
Chapter 8 Options

Changing Work No. by Input Data


The method for selecting the Work No. is selectable either by PLC Input Signal, RS232 Port ID Data or
the HFC3000 Software (for testing). “PLC Input Signal” is set as the factory default setting. To set the
work selection method, the HFC3000 User Console Software must be used.

While the PLC I/O input signal “ID SELECT ENABLE Signal” is “ON,” the “Select by Input ID” Work No.
selection setup [D-No. 411] is enabled. When the signal is “OFF,” “Select by PLC” is available and the
selection for “ID INPUT” is disabled.
ID SELECT
ENABLE INPUT External Input Select Allowable Work Selection
Signal
PLC
Select by PLC
OFF Input ID
HFC3000 Software Select by User Console
PLC Select by PLC
ON Input ID Select by Input ID
HFC3000 Software Select by User Console

Using “Select by Input ID,” a maximum of 5 ASCII characters can be setup for each Work No. allowing
the work No. to be selected by an ASCII data string that comes from the Input ID Data. If the ID data
is not input or the ID data and the selected setting do not match, the PLC I/O output signal
“ABNORMAL” is set “ON” when the (PLC I/O input signal) “START” (or “REVERSE”) is turned “ON.”

Also, the ID data is not updated if the input ID data and the selected setting do not match. Updating
(and holding) of the ID data is only performed if the settings match. If “PLC“ or “HFC3000 Software” is
set, the input ID data is always updated and held.

To clear the ID data, turn ON the PLC I/O input signal “ID DATA CLEAR”. In case of ID data input by
Fieldbus Message, clear the PLC ID data register and then turn ON the PLC I/O input signal “ID DATA
CLEAR” (to be sure you don’t accidentally load the same data back into the ID data buffer.

PAGE 8-12
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces


9

PAGE 9-1
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

9-1 Common Fieldbus Specifications

9-1-1 Fieldbus I/O signal specifications


① INPUT signal format [PLC → HFC3000]
The input signal is a fixed layout.

Word Byte
Singnal Name Connection Contents
No. Bit# No. Bit#
0 0 Unused NO Always off.
1 1 Unused NO Always off.
2 2 Unused NO Always off.
3 3 Unused NO Always off.
Fieldbus message bank reshuffling BIT.
In the case of CC-Link the top position of the message
4 4 BANK SELECT NO
data output can be changed (if data exceeds max
message size)
5 5 Unused NO Always off.
IN
No.01 Executes the following operation by turning signal
“ON”.
6 6 RESET NO ・Stop tightening process
IN ・Clears the PLC I / O fastening result output signals
No.01 (OFF)
・Deletes any entered ID data
Unused Always off.(~V1.300)
7 7 ID SELECT WORK number selection by input ID is enabled setting
NO
ENABLE this signal “ON” (FirmwareV1.301~)
8 0 Unused NO Always off.
9 1 Unused NO Always off.
10 2 Unused NO Always off.
11 IN 3 Unused NO Always off.
12 No.02 4 Work Select Bit0 NO
13 5 Work Select Bit1 NO
Selects Parameter No.1~64 (Work Select 0~5)
14 6 Work Select Bit2 NO
15 7 Work Select Bit3 NO
0 0 STOP NO or NC Emergency Stop
1 1 RESET NO (See RESET signal above)
2 2 REVERSE NO Spindle will reverse (CCW) while “ON”
3 3 START NO Starts fastening cycle
IN
4
No.03
4 PROGRAM NO Bypasses the controller
SELF CHECK
5 5 NO Disables self-check function
Disable
6 6 Unused NO Always off.
IN 7 7 Unused NO Always off.
No.02
8 0 Unused NO Always off.
9 1 Unused NO Always off.
10 2 Unused NO Always off.
11 IN 3 Work Select Bit5 NO Selects Parameter No.1~64 (Work Select 0~5)
12 No.04 4 BATCH OK RESET NO Resets Batch cycle count to 0.
13 5 Work Select Bit4 NO Selects Parameter No.1~64 (Work Select 0~5)
14 6 Unused NO Always off.
15 7 Unused NO Always off.
* Work Select Bits 0 to 5 are enabled with the system parameter: SYS.034 [00xxx1].
(Continued on next page)

PAGE 9-2
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

(Continued from previous page)


Word Byte
Singnal Name Connection Contents
No. Bit# No. Bit#
0 0 Unused NO Always off.
1 1 Unused NO Always off.
2 2 Unused NO Always off.
3 IN 3 Unused NO Always off.
4 No.05 4 Unused NO Always off.
5 5 Unused NO Always off.
6 6 Unused NO Always off.
IN 7 7 Unused NO Always off.
No.03 8 0 Unused NO Always off.
9 1 Unused NO Always off.
10 2 Unused NO Always off.
11 IN 3 Unused NO Always off.
12 No.06 4 Unused NO Always off.
13 5 Unused NO Always off.
14 6 Unused NO Always off.
15 7 Unused NO Always off.
0 0 Unused NO Always off.
1 1 Unused NO Always off.
2 2 Unused NO Always off.
3 IN 3 Unused NO Always off.
4 No.07 4 Unused NO Always off.
5 5 Unused NO Always off.
6 6 Unused NO Always off.
IN 7 7 Unused NO Always off.
No.04 8 0 Unused NO Always off.
9 1 Unused NO Always off.
10 2 Unused NO Always off.
11 IN 3 Unused NO Always off.
12 No.08 4 Unused NO Always off.
13 5 Unused NO Always off.
14 6 Unused NO Always off.
15 7 Unused NO Always off.

PAGE 9-3
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

② OUTPUT signal format [HFC3000→PLC]


The output signal is a fixed layout.
Word Byte
Singnal Name Connection Contents
No. Bit# No. Bit#
0 0 END NO Outputs when fastening operation ends.
1 1 ACCEPT NO Outputs when fastening result falls within set limits
2 2 REJECT NO Outputs when fastening result is outside of set limits.
Outputs when a manual reverse is active
3 3 MANREV NO
Is off if RESET or PROGRAM is input
4 4 BANK OUTPUT NO Outputs if fieldbus message bank reshuffling BIT input is on
5 OUT 5 BATCH OK NO Outputs when Batch fastening is completed within set limits
No.01 Fastening Result
6 6 NO Outputs when fastening ends and data is available
Data Available
With the CF option installed, Outputs when the following
conditions are true
OUT 7 7 CF ERROR NO · CF card not inserted
No.01 · CF card remaining capacity is 1% or less (~ V1.209)
· CF card remaining capacity is less than 20MB (V1.210 ~)
8 0 Work OUTPUT Bit4 NO
Outputs when corresponding Work Select 4~5 inputs ON
9 1 Work OUTPUT Bit5 NO
Outputs when fastening is outside of 1ST Time High and Low
10 2 1ST Time Reject NO
limits
OUT Outputs when fastening is outside of 2ND time High and Low
11 3 2ND Time Reject NO
No.02 limits.
12 4 Work OUTPUT Bit0 NO
13 5 Work OUTPUT Bit1 NO
Outputs when corresponding Work Select 0~3 inputs ON
14 6 Work OUTPUT Bit2 NO
15 7 Work OUTPUT Bit3 NO
0 0 REJECT NO Outputs when fastening result is outside of set limits.
1 1 ACCEPT NO Outputs when fastening result falls within set limits
2 2 ABNORMAL NO Outputs when a system abnormal occurs.
3 3 READY NO Outputs when system is ready to run
4 4 BUSY NO Outputs during fastening or reverse operation
OUT
No.03 TQ HI REJECT Outputs when fastening torque is outside the Peak, Final, and
5 5 NO
SNUG HI REJECT Sung torque High limits.
Outputs when the fastening torque is outside the Peak, and
6 6 TQ LO REJECT NO
Final torque Low limits.
PROGRAM
7 7 NO Output echo of PROGRAM input
OUTPUT
ANG HI REJECT Outputs when the fastening angle is outside the Final and
8 0 NO
OUT DIFF HI REJECT DIFF angle High limits.
No.02 ANG LO REJECT Outputs when the fastening angle is outside the Final and
9 1 NO
DIFF LOW REJECT DIFF angle Low limits.
Outputs when the fastening rate is outside the Rate1 High
10 2 RATE1 HI REJECT NO
limits.
Outputs when the fastening rate is outside the Rate1 Low
11 OUT 3 RATE 1 LO REJECT NO
limits.
No.04 Outputs when the fastening rate is outside the Rate2 High
12 4 RATE 2 HI REJECT NO
limits.
Outputs when the fastening rate is outside the Rate2 Low
13 5 RATE 2 LO REJECT NO
limits.
Outputs when the fastening rate is outside the Rate3 High
14 6 RATE 3 HI REJECT NO
limits.
Outputs when the fastening rate is outside the Rate3 Low
15 7 RATE 3 LO REJECT NO
limits.
(Continued on next page)

PAGE 9-4
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

(Continued from previous page)


Word Byte
Singnal Name Connection Contents
No. Bit# No. Bit#
0 0 Unused NO Always OFF
1 1 Unused NO Always OFF
2 2 Unused NO Always OFF
3 OUT 3 Unused NO Always OFF
4 No.05 4 Unused NO Always OFF
5 5 Unused NO Always OFF
6 6 Unused NO Always OFF
OUT 7 7 Unused NO Always OFF
No.03 8 0 Unused NO Always OFF
9 1 Unused NO Always OFF
10 2 Unused NO Always OFF
11 OUT 3 Unused NO Always OFF
12 No.06 4 Unused NO Always OFF
13 5 Unused NO Always OFF
14 6 Unused NO Always OFF
15 7 Unused NO Always OFF
Unused Always OFF (~V1.209、V1.309)
Output when the CF card remaining capacity is less than
0 0 NO
CF WARNING 200 MB on the controller with the CF card option. (V1.210
~V1.308、V1.310~)
Unused Always OFF (~V1.209、V1.309)
1 OUT 1 NO Output when the fastening operation of the final stage of
BATCH SEQ END
No.07 the batch sequence is OK. (V1.210 to V1.308, V1.310 ~)
2 2 Unused NO Always OFF
3 3 Unused NO Always OFF
OUT 4 4 Unused NO Always OFF
No.04 5 5 Unused NO Always OFF
6 6 Unused NO Always OFF
7 7 Unused NO Always OFF
8 0 Unused NO Always OFF
9 1 Unused NO Always OFF
10 2 Unused NO Always OFF
11 OUT 3 Unused NO Always OFF
12 No.08 4 Unused NO Always OFF
13 5 Unused NO Always OFF
14 6 Unused NO Always OFF
15 7 Unused NO Always OFF

PAGE 9-5
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

9-1-2 Fieldbus Message Output Format (HFC Tool → PLC Data Register)
ASCII Code :182 bytes fixed
(Note: CCLINK is limited to 144byte transfer. If using CCLINK, the use of the ‘BANK: ON’ has been provided to
split the data block so all data may still be communicated. See format below)

Data Format in BANK : OFF


COUNT No. : Incremented by (+1) each fastening
ACCEPT COUNT: Counted number of ACCEPT fastening judgments (JDG: Judgment, OCR: Occurrence)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
ACCEPT
Date (Year: Lower 2 digits) TIME COUNT No. COUNT
31H 32H 2FH 30H 34H 2FH 31H 38H 31H 32H 3AH 33H 34H 3AH 35H 36H 30H 30H 30H 31H 30H 31H
1 2 / 0 4 / 1 8 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 0 0 0 1 0 1

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
Axis No. Parametr No. PEAK TORQUE JDG OCR FINAL TORQUE JDG OCR
30H 31H 30H 31H 31H 32H 2EH 33H 34H 20H 20H 20H 31H 32H 2EH 33H 34H 20H 20H 20H
0 1 0 1 1 2 . 3 4 1 2 . 3 4

43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62
1ST PEAK TORQUE 2ND PEAK TORQUE FINAL ANGLE JDG OCR
31H 32H 2EH 33H 34H 20H 31H 32H 2EH 33H 34H 20H 20H 20H 31H 32H 33H 20H 20H 20H
1 2 . 3 4 1 2 . 3 4 1 2 3

63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
SIGN DIFFERENTIAL ANGLE JDG OCR SIGN RATE 1 JDG OCR

2DH 20H 20H 31H 33H 20H 20H 20H 20H 30H 2EH 31H 32H 33H 20H 20H
SIGN
- 1 0 0 . 1 2 3 " "(20H):+ data
"-"(2DH):- data
79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94
SIGN RATE 2 JDG OCR SIGN RATE 3 JDG OCR

20H 30H 2EH 31H 32H 33H 20H 20H 20H 30H 2EH 31H 32H 33H 20H 20H
0 . 1 2 3 0 . 1 2 3

BANK[ON] START
95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110
1ST TIME JDG OCR 2ND TIME JDG OCR

20H 31H 30H 2EH 30H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 32H 2EH 30H 20H 20H 20H
1 0 . 0 2 . 0

111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132
CYCLE TIME PEAK TORQUE CURRNT PEAK TORQUE ANGLE 1ST RATE INC TOEQUE
20H 20H 33H 2EH 31H 20H 31H 37H 2EH 31H 20H 20H 20H 32H 30H 20H 20H 20H 31H 2EH 32H 20H
3 . 1 1 7 . 1 2 0 1 . 2

133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150
RATE1 INC ANGLE RATE2 INC TOEQUE RATE2 INC ANGLE
20H 20H 20H 20H 33H 20H 20H 20H 38H 2EH 39H 20H 20H 20H 20H 31H 37H 20H
3 8 . 9 1 7

151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166
RATE3 INC TOEQUE RATE3 INC ANGLE RUNDOWN REVO.
20H 20H 30H 2EH 30H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 30H 20H 20H 33H 2EH 35H
0 . 0 0 3 . 5

167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182
CALIBRATION VOLT SIGN ZERO VOLT SNUG DETECTION TORQUE JDG JDG
32H 20H 31H 31H 20H 32H 36H 31H 20H 32H 2EH 33H 34H 20H 4FH 20H "O"(4FH): ACCEPT
2 5 1 1 2 6 1 2 . 3 4 O

PAGE 9-6
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

Data Format in BANK : ON (Extended Message Data) (JDG: Judgment, OCR: Occurrence)
REJECT Occurrence
BANK
"X"(58H):
[OFF] 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110
Signifies the REJECT which
[ON ] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
occured first.
OCR
1ST TIME JDG OCR 2ND TIME JDG
20H 31H 30H 2EH 30H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 32H 2EH 30H 48H 58H 20H
1 0 . 0 2 . 0 H X

[OFF] 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132
[ON ] 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
CYCLE TIME PEAK TORQUE CURRNT PEAK TORQUE ANGLE RATE1 INC TORQUE
20H 20H 33H 2EH 31H 20H 31H 37H 2EH 31H 20H 20H 20H 32H 30H 20H 20H 20H 31H 2EH 32H 20H
3 . 1 1 7 . 1 2 0 1 . 2

[OFF] 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 149 148 150
[ON ] 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 55 54 56
RATE1 INC ANGLE RATE2 INC TOEQUE RATE2 INC ANGLE
20H 20H 20H 20H 33H 20H 20H 20H 38H 2EH 39H 20H 20H 20H 20H 31H 37H 20H
3 8 . 9 1 7

[OFF] 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166
[ON ] 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
RATE3 INC TORQUE RATE3 INC ANGLE RUNDOWN REVO.
20H 20H 30H 2EH 30H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 30H 20H 20H 33H 2EH 35H
0 . 0 0 3 . 5

[OFF] 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182
[ON ] 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88
CALIBRATION VOLT SIGN ZERO VOLT SNUG DETECTION TORQUE JDG
32H 20H 31H 31H 20H 32H 36H 31H 20H 32H 2EH 33H 34H 20H 58H 20H
2 5 1 1 2 6 1 2 . 3 4 X

[PEAK TORQUE] JDG


"H"(48H):Hight REJECT "L"(4CH):Low REJECT JDG
"X"(58H):REJECT
"A"(41H):Abnormal "S"(53H):STOP
"R"(52H):RESET "B"(42H):PROGRAM
"D"(44H):START OFF(Start Trigger OFF before cycle complete)
※"A","B","D","R","S" does not have occurrance.
[FINAL TORQUE],[ ANGLE],[RATE],[TIME] JDG
"H"(48H):Hight REJECT "L"(4CH):Low REJECT

[OFF] 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200
[ON ] 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 ・・・・・・ 200

00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H … 00H

PAGE 9-7
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

9-1-3 Fieldbus Interface Setup (HFC3000 Software)


The fieldbus settings are set in the “Fieldbus Setup” menu of the HFC3000 User Console Software. The
below ‘window’ is displayed when “OPTION” → “Fieldbus Setup” is selected from the menu bar.
In the ‘Fieldbus Setup’ screen, selection of the fieldbus type, uploading, downloading, verification of
fieldbus settings (between PC & controller), Browsing and Saving of fieldbus settings to the PC can be
performed.

- The factory settings are setup in the controller. Do not change the settings unless
there is a special reason.
- Perform a parameter backup before changing the fieldbus settings of the controller.
Caution - When "Browse" is selected, if the file version of "HFC3000 software" and a “fieldbus
configuration file" is different, a warning (window) is displayed in the software.

●Bus Type Select: Selects the type of fieldbus interface from a pull-down list. (When “Upload” is performed, the
bus type is shown in the ‘Bus Type Select’ window.

●Configuration File
・Browse: A fieldbus configuration file (*.nrfcf) is read from the PC.
・Save: A fieldbus configuration file (*.nrfcf) is saved in the PC.
●Upload: The Fieldbus Setup is read from the HFC3000 controller and uploaded to the PC HFC
Software. If the “File version check” checkbox in the “Upload/Download” screen is
checked, the file version is checked.
●Download: The Fieldbus Setup is written from the PC to the HFC3000 controller. If the “File version
check” checkbox in the “Upload/Download” screen is checked, the file version is checked.

●Verify: The Fieldbus Setup of the HFC3000 Controller and the Fieldbus Setup in the HFC3000
User Console Software is compared.

PAGE 9-8
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

9-2. EtherNet/IP
The HFC3000 EtherNet/IP fieldbus interface conforms to the open field network EtherNet/IP. Control of tools and
transactions of message information are executed by EtherNet/IP Explicit message communication.
Due to conformance with the open field network EtherNet/IP System, connections with EtherNet/IP devices
(master/slave) of other manufacturers are enabled.
Also, remote I/O communication and message communication can be executed at the same time.

9-2-1. System Structure

PLC (EtherNet/IP Master Station)

Remote I/O Communication


Message Communication

EtherNet/IP
Slave Station
EtherNet/IP Slave Stations of Other
Manufacturers

HFC3000 EtherNet/IP System

PAGE 9-9
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

9-2-2 Hardware Setting

Module
Status
LED

Link/
Activity
LED

EtherNet/IP
connector

Network
Status
LED

PAGE 9-10
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

● EDS File
An EDS file is an information file related to the communication specifications of EtherNet/IP-compatible device
and a separate, individual file exists for each device. The EDS file is necessary for using the PLC EtherNet/IP
configuration software to connect the MFC-EN and the PLC.
The EDS file is included in the installation CD and/or downloadable from the FEC website. Please refer to the
PLC instruction manual for the EtherNet/IP configuration software concerning the appropriate method for using
the EDS file.

● Module Pin Configuration


No. Signal Description
1 TD+ Send data +
2 TD- Send data -
3 RD+ Receive data +
4 - Not used
5 - Not used
6 RD- Receive data -
7 - Not used
8 - Not used

* The cable is not included with the equipment. Please provide a LAN cable of Category 5e or higher.

・Be sure to connect the cable with all power turned OFF.

PAGE 9-11
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

● List of LED Indications


The module LEDs indicate the node status of the AFC3000 Ethernet-I/P System and the network state.

A : Network B : Module
Status LED Status LED
C : Link
Activity LED

LED Color State Details


Off Off Offline Offline, No power or no IP address
Lit up Online Online, One or more connections established
Network Gree
Status n Communication not
A Flash online, connection is not establishe
established
LED
Lit up Error Fatal error has occurred. / Conflicting IP address.
Red
Flash Connection timeout One or more connection timeout has occurred
Off Off Power OFF Power is not supplied.
Lit up Online Controlled by a scanner in RUN state -
Module Gree
B n Communication not Incomplete / wrong configuration or scanner in idle
Status Flash
established state
LED
Lit up Error Major Fault -A critical error has occurred.
Red
Flash Error A recoverable error has occurred.
ETHERNET link is not established and
Off Off Link not established
communication is not performed.
Link
ETHERNET link is established but not
C Activity Lit up Link Established
Gree communicating
LED n ETHERNET link is established and communication
Flash Communicating
is in progress.

9-2-3 I/O Signal Specifications


I/O Input/Output Message Input/Output
Controller to PLC PLC to Controller Controller to PLC PLC to Controller
Maximum
32 bytes (256 bits) 8 bytes (64 bits) 4096 bytes 32bytes
Setting
Standard
16 bytes (128 bits) 8 bytes (64 bits) 200 bytes 32bytes
Setting

PAGE 9-12
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces
9-2-4 Fieldbus Setting

Setting of the Ethernet-I/P interface is performed in the Ethernet-I/P screen (of the HFC3000 Software). The network
settings, the I/O size, and the message size can be changed.

● Default (the settings below are set to the factory default settings when this is selected)
・ Network Settings
IP address 192.168.10.50
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway 192.168.10.1
・ I/O Setting Data Length [PLC to HFC Controller]: 8 bytes [64 bits]
・ I/O Setting Data Length [HFC Controller to PLC]: 16 bytes [128 bits]
・ Message Data Length [PLC to HFC Controller]: 32 bytes [256 bits]
・ Message Data Length [HFC Controller to PLC]: 200 bytes [1600 bits]
* The number of message block bytes is fixed at 200 bytes.
● I/O Size setting
・ Data Length [PLC to HFC Controller]
Setting range: 2 bytes [16 bits] to 8 bytes [64bits]
・ Data Length [HFC Controller to PLC]
Setting range: 2 bytes [16 bits] to 32 bytes [256 bits]
● Message Bytes Size Settings
・ Data Length [PLC to HFC Controller]
Setting range: 0 byte [0 bit] to 32 bytes [256 bits]
・ Data Length [HFC Controller to PLC]
Setting range: 0 byte [0 bit] to 4096 bytes [32768 bits]

Note: Power must be cycled if any of this configuration is changed and downloaded to the HFC controller

PAGE 9-13
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces
PLC Setting Example

This procedure is written for using Rockwell Automation RXLogix5000 V15.02.00 and Allen Bradley CompactLogix
L32E. If the system is not the same as listed above, setup may be different. Please contact to PLC
manufacturer for detail as each PLC may be different

1. Register MASTER Spindle Fieldbus unit to network


In the PLC I/O configuration, right click on “Ethernet Port Local ENB” and select “New Module”

Select “Generic Ethernet Module” from “module” list and click the OK button.

PAGE 9-14
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

Specify “Name” (FEC HFC3000), “IP address”, and “Connection Parameters” that matches the parameters set
to the Fieldbus setup using the HFC3000 User Console software.

Note: Input / Output size MUST match the settings programmed in the Ethernet I/P setting of the HFC3000
Fieldbus setup or PLC (Ethernet I/P) error will occur.

AFC3000

Click on the “Connection” tab and set connection setup as below.

PAGE 9-15
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

When the HFC3000 Fieldbus unit is added to the I/O configuration, the data table will be added to the
controller tags automatically.

HFC3000_2:I (shown as AFC1500 in above screenshot)


Input signals from AFC3000 controller. (FEC to PLC)
HFC1500_2:O (shown as AFC1500 in above screenshot)
Output signals to AFC3000 controller. (PLC to FEC)
HFC1500_2:C (shown as AFC1500 in above screenshot)
Message communication data from the HFC3000 controller. (HFC Controller to PLC for fastening result data.)
An additional program/command needs to be added for sending/retrieving the data.

PAGE 9-16
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

2. Transferring the Fastening Result Data using the MSG function.

Since the message data format is fixed in the HFC3000 controller, no HFC3000 data configuration is required. (The
fastening data will be output to the PLC in the format shown in section 9-1-2 Fieldbus Message Output Format)
The data will be retrieved by the PLC using the PLC logic messaging command.

PLC program.

1. Read_Tag needs be added to the “Controller Tags” for message transfer


This data tag contains the configuration of the message transfer.
Each MSG command needs to have its own Read_ tag.

AFC3000
AFC3000
AFC3000

0
The MSG command is used for transferring the fastening result.

PAGE 9-17
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

Property of the MSG command is shown below. (Right Click in MSG command)

A2
HFC3000:C.Data[0]
5

Message Type CIP Generic


Service Type Get Attribute Single
Service Code E
Class A2
Instance 1
Attribute 5
Destination The controller tag “C” should be selected

Note: Each message command can only handle 200 bytes. The HFC3000 only has a total of 182 bytes of
data per cycle so only one command is necessary to retrieve all fastening data from one cycle.

PAGE 9-18
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces
At the communication tab screen, select “Path”. The HFC3000 controller will show up in the browser as
shown below.

AFC3000
AFC3000

AFC3000
AFC3000

ETHERNET-MODULE HFC3000

PAGE 9-19
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

An example of a message transfer PLC program is shown below.

HFC3000:C.Data[0] HFC3000:C.Data[250]
200 200

This program transfers up to 200 bytes of fastening result data.


The MSG command has “1” as “Instance” and is sending the data into HFC1500:C[0] memory block.

Note: All instructions above that show “AFC1500” would be labeled “HFC3000” for the HFC3000 setup. I/O
addresses are not actual and should reflect the fixed I/O layout as shown in section 9-1-1 Fieldbus I/O Layout.

Note: The above information contained in this procedure are meant for REFERENCE ONLY when configuring
an FEC Ethernet I/P interface using FEC HFC3000 User Console Software, FEC HFC3000 Nutrunner
System, Rockwell Automation RSlogix 5000 software and Allen Bradley CompactLogix L32E hardware. Actual
application configuration may differ from this set-up depending on the PLC chosen for the application.

PAGE 9-20
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces
Message Data Example written for an AFC1500 System showing the :C register data
Note that screens and data for the HFC3000 would vary slightly – this is an example only for reference what
the message data will look like in the PLC. (“AFC1500” would be “HFC3000” for HFC3000 system)

AFC1500 User
Console MONITOR
Screen for above Data

PAGE 9-21
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

Fieldbus Message Setting (PART ID Data - PLC to FEC HFC Controller)


1. Contents of Sent Data: ASCII Data
Refer to 3. below regarding the actual sent results.
2. Max. message length: 16words/32 bytes
(As configured in HFC3000 Software)
3. Input Example
Select ASCII letters to send message information from the PLC to the HFC Controller for PC communication
and I/O (PLC) control. (Only ASCII Data can be recognized by FEC controller)
The message information sent from the PLC to the HFC Controller will be reflected in the part ID data in the
HFC3000 User Console and the RS232C Data port output.
- The standard set value for the ID input data is 32 bytes (16 words). Be careful because
even when a value beyond this is set, only the 32 bytes from the start are saved in the
fastening result retention of the Controller.
- Do not use the following characters.
Caution “∖”: backslash (yen mark), “/”: slash,
“:”: colon, “*”: asterisk, “?”: question mark,
“””: double quotation, “<” “>”: inequality signs, “|”: pipe sign

Data from the PLC register is sent to the ‘Part ID’ buffer in the HFC controller using the messaging data write
command.

PAGE 9-22
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

PLC CONFIGURATION – DATA WRITE

A ‘Write_Tag’ needs to be added to the ‘Controller Tags’ for data to be sent from the PLC to the FEC HFC Controller.
(Such as part ID Data) This data when received by the FEC HFC Controller will be ‘Married” with the fastening result
data so that the fastening data would now contain the part ID number providing a ‘birth history’ for the part being
fastened.
The “Write_Tag” contains the configuration of the message transfer. A MSG command (Message command in the
PLC logic) must be used in conjunction with a ‘Write_Tag’ to send data. In the case below, ‘VIN_Number_Write’ tag
has been setup and configured (following pages)

PAGE 9-23
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

Below are the properties which must be setup for the Message Configuration of the Write_Tag.
(Right Click in MSG command)

Message Type CIP Generic


Service Type Get Attribute Single
Service Code 10
Class A2
Instance 1
Attribute 5
Destination The controller tag “VIN_Number” or whatever Write Tag you setup should be selected

Note: The FEC HFC Controller will only take a maximum of 32 Bytes for the Write_Tag (Part ID data) configurable
(between 0-32 bytes) in the HFC3000 software for the Fieldbus Message Setup. So an instance of “1” is all that is
required in the above setup for WRITING data using the Message Command.

PAGE 9-24
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

PLC Logic Example: Sending Message data to FEC Master Spindle

The MSG message command initiates the message data to be sent or received. The ‘Write” tag sends the data to the
device connected, and the ‘Read’ tag retrieves the data from the connected device.
In the example above, the Write MSG command takes place at or near the start of the machine cycle before the FEC
controller has been issued a START command. (The FEC HFC Controller, must receive the Write Data before the
cycle START is given (before the cycle is started). Once received, the data is buffered and will be used until new
message data is received or the “ID DATA CLEAR” Input signal is enabled (See Input signals). (The ID data received
by the FEC HFC Controller will be married with the fastening data and will continue to use the same message data it
receives until new data is sent or the ID Data Clear signal is turned on. Care must be taken so data is not recorded with
the same ID data in that case)
The “Read” Tag in the example above is shown happening AFTER the FEC fastening is completed. Once fastening
is completed, the MSG Read command can be performed and the fastening result data will be read into the PLC.

PAGE 9-25
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

9-3. CC-Link
The HFC3000 CC-Link System conforms to the open field network CC-Link Ver 2.00. Control of tools and
transaction of message information are executed by communication.
Due to conformance to the open field network CC-Link Ver 2.00 System, connections with a CC-Link Ver 2.0
master station, Ver 1.10/2.00 remote device stations, and Ver 1.10 remote I/O stations are enabled. Also, I/O
communication and message communication can be executed at the same time.

9-3-1 System Structure

PLC (CC-Link Ver 2.00 Master Station)

I/O Communication
Message Communication

CC-Link
Ver. 2.00
Remote CC-Link Ver 1.10/2.00
Device
Remote Device Stations
Station
Ver. 1.10 Remote I/O Stations

HFC3000 CC-Link System

PAGE 9-26
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces
9-3-2 Description of the hardware

ERROR LED

CC-Link
Connector

RUN LED

PAGE 9-27
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

● Module Pin Configuration


No. Signal Wire Color Description 12345
1 DA Black Sending side
2 DB Blue Receiving side
3 DG - Signal ground
4 SLD White Shield
5 FG Red Ground

Manufacturer: Phoenix Contact


Type: Connector plug
Model: MSTB 2.5/5-ST-5.08 AU M
Applicable wire size: AWG 14 ~ 23 or 0.25mm2 ~ 2.5mm2
* The connector is provided with the equipment.
The cable supplied by customer

However, the compatible wire size and recommended rod terminals (ferrules) are as follows.
・ Compatible wire size ・・・ AWG 14 ~ 23 (0.25mm2 ~ 2.5mm2)
・ Recommended rod terminals (ferrules)
・・・ Model: AI 2,5-6 WH (Phoenix Contact)

・ Be sure to connect the cable with all power OFF.


Caution

The module LEDs indicate the node status of the HFC3000 CC-Link System and the network state.

A: RUN LED B: ERROR (ERR) LED

● List of LED Indications


LED Color State Details
OFF Off Offline Power is not supplied or connection is not established.
RUN
A Green Lit on Online Communicating normally.
LED
Red Lit on Error A critical error has occurred.
OFF Off Offline No error
ERR Lit on Error A critical error has occurred.
B
LED Red Flickering CRC error A cyclic redundancy check (CRC) error has occurred.
Flash Minor error Station No. or baud rate setting is changed after power on.

・ Even though no problem is indicated by the CCLINK LED (ex. RUN LED: green Lits on, ERR
Caution LED:off), if the PLC CCLINK configuration does not match the Fieldbus setup that is setup
in the HFC controller, the HFC3000 CC-LINK system can not communicate. Confirm I/O
size, Occupied Station number , Cyclic settings, etc. all match) (PAGE9-16)

PAGE 9-28
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

9-3-3 I/O Signal Specifications

I/O Input/Output Message Input/Output


Controller to PLC PLC to Controller Controller to PLC PLC to Controller
Maximum
110 bytes (880 points) 110 bytes (880 points) 88 words 87 words
Setting
Standard
78bytes (624 points) 78 bytes (624 points) 88 words 87words
Setting
<Area per Station ・ 1 Time Setting> * PLC CC-Link V1.10 Master Station▼
1 Station Occupied 2 Stations Occupied 3 Stations Occupied 4 Stations Occupied
Type Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of
Occupied Available Occupied Available Occupied Available Occupied Available
Points Points Points Points Points Points Points Points

RX 16 points 48 points 80 points 112 points


32 points*1 64 points*1 96 points*1 128 points*1
RY 16 points 48 points 80 points 112 points
RWw 4 words 8 words 12 words 16 words
RWr*2 3 words 7 words 11 words 15 words

<Area per Station ・ 2 Times Setting>


1 Station Occupied 2 Stations Occupied 3 Stations Occupied 4 Stations Occupied
Type Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of
Occupied Available Occupied Available Occupied Available Occupied Available
Points Points Points Points Points Points Points Points
RX 16 points 80 points 144 points 208 points
32
96 points*1 160 points*1 224 points*1
points*1
RY 16 points 80 points 144 points 208 points
RWw 8 words 16 words 24 words 32 words
RWr*2 7 words 15 words 23 words 31 words

<Area per Station ・ 4 Times Setting>


1 Station Occupied 2 Stations Occupied 3 Stations Occupied 4 Stations Occupied
Type Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of
Occupied Available Occupied Available Occupied Available Occupied Available
Points Points Points Points Points Points Points Points

RX 48 points 176 points 304 points 432 points


64 points*1 192 points*1 320 points*1 448 points*1
RY 48 points 176 points 304 points 432 points
RWw 16 words 32 words 48 words 64 words
RWr*2 15 words 31 words 47 words 63 words

<Area per Station ・ 8 Times Setting> * Standard Setting▼


1 Station Occupied 2 Stations Occupied 3 Stations Occupied 4 Stations Occupied
Type Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of
Occupied Available Occupied Available Occupied Available Occupied Available
Points Points Points Points Points Points Points Points
RX 112 points 368 points 624 points 880 points
128 points*1 384 points*1 640 points*1 896 points*1
RY 112 points 368 points 624 points 880 points
RWw 32 words 64 words 88 words*3 72 words*3
RWr*2 31 words 63 words 87 words*3 71 words*3
*1: 16 of the occupied points are used by the system area and the number of available points is decreased
accordingly.
*2: With RWr, 1 word is used for the error code and the area thereof is therefore 1 word less than that of RWw.
*3: The message input/output setting is restricted to a maximum of 256 bytes that is the total of the remote
input/output (RX/RY) and the remote registers (RWw/RWr) (640 points + 88 words, 896 points + 72 words).

PAGE 9-29
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

9-3-4 Fieldbus Setup


Setting of the Anybus-CompactCom CC-Link is performed in the CC-Link tab (of the HFC3000 Software).
The station No., the communication speed, the number of occupied stations, the extended cyclic setting, and
the CC-Link version can be changed.

●Default (the settings are set to the factory settings)


・Station: 1
・Speed: 10M bps
・Occupied Stations: 3 stations(CC-Link V2), 4 stations (CC-Link V1)
・Extended Cyclic Setting: 8 times (CC-Link V2), 1 time (CC-Link V1)

* Message Block Bytes is fixed at 176 bytes max by CCLINK.


●Station
Setting range: 1 ~ 64
●Speed
Setting range: 156kbps, 625kbps, 2.5Mbps, 5Mbps, 10Mbps
●CC-Link Version
Setting range: CC-Link V2, CC-Link V1
●Occupied Stations
Setting range: 1 station, 2 stations, 3 stations, 4 stations (* fixed at 4 stations with CC-Link V1)
●Extended Cyclic Setting
Setting range: 1 time, 2 times, 4 times, 8 times (* fixed at 1 time with CC-Link V1)

●Remote I/O (RX/RY)


●Remote Register (RWw/RWr)
This can be set in accordance with the combination of the extended cyclic setting and the number of occupied
stations.

PAGE 9-30
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces
9-3-5 MELSEC-Q Series Parameter Setting (Example)
Start up GX Developer → Prepare PC Series QCPU (Q mode) Project →
Parameter → Network Parameter → Set List of CC-Link

Example of PLC setting using (3) AFC3000 systems (3 CCLINK connections)

1 2

4
5

1. Select “Remote Net (Ver. 2 Mode)” at Mode Select.


2. Set the All Connect Count (3) for number of connected Remote Device stations
3. Set the refresh device Remote Input (X100) / Output (Y100) at “Remote Output (RX / RY).”
4. Set the refresh device Remote Register read (D1000) at “Remote Register (RWr).”
5. Set the refresh device Remote Register write (D4000) at “Remote Register (RWw).”
* The allocated set values differ according to the station No. of the Controller used.
6. Set the station information at Station Information Setting (the picture below shows an example for reference).

Station information Setting example (#6 above)

PAGE 9-31
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces
9-3-6 System Area PLC Handshake

Enabling the CC-Link connection to the PLC


PLC Ladder logic is required to enable the CC-Link communication link. The logic must address the enable bit
(Initial Data Processing Request) of which the address changes based on the size setting used. The last 16 bits
of both the Inputs and outputs (no matter what size is configured) is the CCLINK system setting area and this is
where the link must be enabled.

Below is an example of CC-Link configuration settings made by GX Developer software and how memory is allocated. This
configuration has 3 sets of HFC3000 controllers connected with 4 occupied stations / 8 extended cyclic cycles. (I/O 896 Points,
Message 72 Words)

Item HFC3000 HFC3000 HFC3000


(System 1) (System 2) (System 3)
CC-Link Station Number 1 5 9
Configured Size (4 occupied stations/8Cyclic cycles) 896 (880 useable) 896 (880 useable) 896 (880 useable)
EM-STOP (First bit of PLC output) Y100 Y480 Y800
Total Reject (First bit of AFC3000 Output) X100 X480 X800
Part ID message output to AFC3000 Controllers D4000 D4072 D4144
Fastening result message from AFC3000 controllers D1000 D1072 D1144
CC-Link Request address X478 X7F8 XB78
CC-Link Enable address Y478 Y7F8 YB78

In the case of the first HFC3000 System (1) (shown in the table above), the PLC program is set so that when the
888th (378h) bit (“Initial Data Processing Request”) in the (CC-Link Reserved) system area (X area) is turned “ON”,
the output at the 888th (378h) bit (“Initial Data Processing Complete”) of the system area (Y area) is set “ON”.
(Note: See pages 8 & 14 for CCLINK handshaking signal location)

Since the X/Y starting address of (System 1) is configured to start at X100 and Y100, this must be added to the
addresses and therefore (100h+378h) 478h is specified for the X area and the Y area as shown in the PLC Logic
diagram below to enable Station 1’s link.
For Station 2’s link, the starting address (X/Y480) is added to the 888th (378h) bit for that station which is address
(480h + 378h) X/Y7F8.
For Station 3’s link, the starting address (X/Y800) is added to the 888th (378h) bit for that station which is address
X/YB78.

PLC Logic example that would be required to enable the CC-Link in the three systems listed above

PAGE 9-32
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces
●Timing Chart of Handshaking Bits
If the handshake is successful, “Remote READY” turns ON.

ON
RX(n+mh)8h
Initial Data Processing Request OFF

ON
RY(n+mh)8h
Initial Data Processing Complete OFF

ON
RX(n+mh)Bh
Remote READY OFF

X area
Y area

● Location of Handshaking Bits According to Size Configuration


Cyclic Cycles
1 Occupied Station 2 Occupied Stations 3 Occupied Stations 4 Occupied Stations
Setting
24th bit 56th bit 88th bit 120th bit
1
18h 38h 58h 78h
24th bit 88th bit 152th bit 216th bit
2
18h 58h 98h D8h
56th bit 184th bit 312th bit 440th bit
4
38h B8h 138h 1B8h
120th bit 376th bit 632th bit 888th bit
8
78h 178h 278h 378h
(Location of “Initial Data Processing Request” and “Initial Data Processing Complete” Bits)
“h” = hexadecimal

PAGE 9-33
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces
Fieldbus Message Setting (PLC → HFC Controller)
1. Contents of Sent Data: ASCII Data
(Refer to 3 below regarding the actual sent data results.)
2. Max. message length: 16words/32 bytes
(As configured in HFC3000 Software)
3. Input Example
Select ASCII letters to send message information from the PLC to the HFC Controller for PC communication
and I/O (PLC) control. (Only ASCII Data can be recognized by FEC controller)
The message information sent from the PLC to the HFC Controller will be reflected in the part ID data in the
HFC3000 User Console and the RS232C Data port output.

- The standard set value for the ID input data is 32 bytes (16 words). Be careful because
even when a value beyond this is set, only the first 32 bytes are saved in the fastening
result memory storage of the Controller.
- Do not use the following characters.
Caution “∖”: backslash (yen mark), “/”: slash,
“:”: colon, “*”: asterisk, “?”: question mark,
“””: double quotation, “<” “>”: inequality signs, “|”: pipe sign

PAGE 9-34
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

9-4 PROFIBUS DP-V1


The HFC3000 PROFIBUS DP-V1 System conforms to the open field network PROFIBUS DP-V1. Control of
tools and transaction of message information are executed by cyclic I/O communication and acyclic message
communication. Due to conformance to the open field network PROFIBUS DP-V1 system, connections with
PROFIBUS DP-V1 devices (master/slave) of other manufacturers are enabled.
Also, cyclic I/O communication and acyclic message communication can be executed at the same time.

9-4-1 System Structure

PLC (PROFIBUS DP-V1 Master Station)

Cyclic I/O Communication


Acyclic Message Communication

PROFIBUS
DP-V1
Slave Station PROFIBUS DP-V1 Slave Stations of Other
Manufacturers

HFC3000 PROFIBUS DP-V1 System

PAGE 9-35
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

9-4-2 Description of the Hardware

Status
LED

PROFIBUS
DP-V1
Connetor

Operation
Mode
LED

● GSD File
A GSD file is an information file related to the communication specifications of PROFIBUS
DP-V1-compatible device and a separate, individual file exists for each device. The GSD file is necessary for
using the PROFIBUS DP-V1 configuration software to connect the HFC3000 and the PLC. The GSD file is
included in the System Reference CD for the HFC3000 system.
● Module Pin Configuration
No. Signal Description
1 - Connection prohibited 5 1
2 - Connection prohibited
3 RxD/TxD-P Data sending/receiving + (B line ・ P side)
4 CNTR-P RTS
5 DGND Communication power (ground side)
6 VP+5 Communication power (+5V side)
7 - Connection prohibited
8 RxD/TxD-N Data sending/receiving - (A line ・ N side) 9 6
9 - Connection prohibited

* The connector (D-SUB 9-pin plug) at the cable side and the cable are not provided with the equipment.

・ Be sure to connect the cable with all power being OFF.


Caution

PAGE 9-36
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

● List of LED Indications


The module LEDs indicate the node status of the HFC3000 PROFIBUS DP-V1 System and the network
state.

A: Operation
B: Status LED
Mode LED

LED Color State Details


OFF Off Offline Offline or power is not supplied.
Operation Lit on Online Data communication in progress.
Green
Mode Flash Online Clearing data.
A
LED Flash 1 Parameter error There is an error in the parameter setting.
Red An error has occurred in the Profibus
Flash 2 Configuration error
configuration (setting).
Power is not supplied.
Power OFF
OFF Off Network is being initialized.
Uninitialized
Module is being set up.
Status
B The module has transitioned from the initial
LED Lit on Normal operation
Green state.
Flash 1 Diagnosis event The diagnosis event is being executed.
Red Lit on Exceptional error A crucial error has occurred.

PAGE 9-37
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

9-4-3 I/O Signal Specifications

I/O Input/Output Message Input/Output


Controller to PLC PLC to Controller Controller to PLC PLC to Controller
Maximum
32 bytes (256 points) 32 bytes (256 points) 4096 bytes 32bytes
Setting
Standard
8 bytes (64 points) 16 bytes (128 points) 200bytes 32 bytes
Setting

9-4-4 Fieldbus Setup

Setting of the Anybus-CompactCom PROFIBUS DP-V1 is performed In the PROFIBUS DP-V1 tab of the
HFC3000 software. The node address, the I/O settings, and the message settings can be changed.

●Default (the settings are set to the factory settings)


・Node Address: 3
・Setting I/O [PLC to Controller]: 8bytes[64bits]
・Setting I/O [Controller to PLC]: 16bytes[128bits]
・Message Bytes Settings[PLC to Controller]: 32bytes
・Message Bytes Settings [Controller to PLC]: 200bytes
* Message Block Bytes is fixed at 64 bytes.
●Node Address
Setting range: 0 ~ 125
●Setting I/O
・[PLC to Controller]
Setting range: 2bytes [16bits] ~ 8bytes [64bits]
・[Controller to PLC]
Setting range: 2bytes [16bits] ~ 32bytes [256bits]
● Message Bytes Settings
・[PLC to Controller]
Setting range: 0byte ~ 32bytes
・[Controller to PLC]
Setting range: 0byte ~ 4096bytes

PAGE 9-38
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

9-5 DeviceNet
The HFC3000 Device Net System conforms to the open field network DeviceNet. Control of tools and transaction
of message information are executed by DeviceNet Explicit message communication.
Conformance to the open field network DeviceNet System, enables connections with DeviceNet devices
(master/slave) of other manufacturers.
Also, remote I/O communication and Explicit message communication can be executed at the same time.

9-5-1 System Structure

PLC (DeviceNet Master Station)

Remote I/O Communication


Explicit Message Communication

DeviceNet
Slave
Station DeviceNet Slave Stations of Other
Manufacturers

HFC3000 DeviceNet System

PAGE 9-39
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

9-5-2 Description of the Hardware

Module
Status
LED

DeviceNet
Connector

Network
Status
LED

● EDS File
An EDS file is an information file related to the communication specifications of Device Net-compatible device
and a separate, individual file exists for each device. The EDS file is necessary for using the Device Net
configuration software to connect the MFC-DN and the PLC.
The EDS file is included in the installation CD and/or downloadable from the FEC website. Please refer to the
PLC manufacturer instruction manual for the Device Net configuration software concerning the appropriate
method for using the EDS file.

PAGE 9-40
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces
● Module Pin Configuration
No. Signal Wire Color Description 12345
1 V- Black Power cable - side
2 CAL L Blue Communication data Low side
3 SHUELD - Shield
4 CAL H White Communication data High
5 V+ Red Power cable + side

Manufacturer: Phoenix Contact


Type: Connector plug
Model: MSTB 2.5/5-ST-5.08 AU M
Applicable wire size: AWG 14 ~ 23 or 0.25mm2 ~ 2.5mm2
* The connector is provided with the equipment.
The cable is not included (customer supplied).

The compatible wire size and recommended rod terminals (ferrules) are as follows;
・ Compatible wire size ・・・ AWG 14 ~ 23 (0.25mm2 ~ 2.5mm2)
・ Recommended rod terminals (ferrules)
・・・ Model: AI 2,5-6 WH (Phoenix Contact)

・ Be sure to connect the cable with all power OFF.


Caution

● List of LED Indications


The module LEDs indicate the node status of the AFC3000 Device Net System and the network state.

A : Network B : Module
Status LED Status LED

LED Color State Details


OFF Off Offline Offline or power is not supplied.
Lit on Online Communicating normally.
Green Connection
Network Flash Although online, connection is unestablished.
unestablished
A Status
Lit on Error A critical error has occurred.
LED Red
Flash Connection timeout A connection timeout has occurred once or more.
Red/
Lit on Repeated Test mode
Green
OFF Off Power OFF Power is not supplied.
Lit on Online Normal state
Green Connection Due to incomplete configuration or connection failure, the
Module Flash
unestablished device must be re-recognized.
B Status
Lit on Error A critical error has occurred.
LED Red
Flash Error A recoverable error has occurred.
Red/
Lit on Repeated Test mode
Green

PAGE 9-41
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

9-5-3 I/O Signal Specifications


I/O Input/Output Message Input/Output
Controller to PLC PLC to Controller Controller to PLC PLC to Controller
Maximum
32 bytes (256 points) 8 bytes (64 points) 4096 bytes 32 bytes
Setting
Standard
16 bytes (128 points) 8 bytes (64 points) 200 bytes 32 bytes
Setting

9-5-4 Fieldbus Setup


Using the HFC3000 Software setting of the Anybus-CompactCom Device Net is performed in the Device Net
window.
The communication speed, the node address, the I/O settings, and the message settings can be changed.

●Default (the settings are set to the factory settings)


・Node Address:0 ・Speed: 500k bps
・Setting I/O [PLC to Axis]: 8bytes[64bits]
・Setting I/O [Axis to PLC]: 16bytes[128bits]
・Message Bytes Settings[PLC to Axis]: 32bytes
・Message Bytes Settings [Axis to PLC]: 200bytes
* Message Block Bytes is fixed at 200 bytes.
●Node Address
Setting range: 0 ~ 63
●Speed
Setting range: 156kbps, 250kbps, 500kbps
●Setting I/O
・[PLC to Controller]
Setting range: 2bytes [16bits] ~ 8bytes[64bits]
・[Controller to PLC]
Setting range: 2bytes [16bits] ~ 32bytes[256bits]

(continued on next page)

PAGE 9-42
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

●Message Bytes Settings


・[PLC to Controller]
Setting range: 0byte ~ 32bytes
・[Controller to PLC]
Setting range: 0byte ~ 4096bytes

PLC Setting Example

Please reference the Ethernet I/P PLC example (Section 9-2)

PAGE 9-43
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

9-6 PROFINET I/O

The HFC3000 PROFINET I/O System conforms to the open field network PROFINET I/O. Control of tools and
transaction of message information are executed by cyclic message communication.

Conformance to the open field network PROFINET I/O System, enables connections with PROFINET I/O devices
(master/slave) of other manufacturers.

Remote I/O communication and cyclic message data communication can be executed at the same time.

9-6-1 System Structure

PLC (PROFINET I/O Master Station)

Remote I/O Communication


Cyclic Message Communication

PROFINET
IO Slave
PROFINET I/O Slave Stations of
Station
Other Manufacturers

HFC3000 PROFINET I/O System

PAGE 9-44
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

9-6-2 Description of the Hardware

Module
Status
LED

Link/
Activity
LED

ProfiNet I/O
Connector

Network
Status
LED

● GSDML File
A GSDML file is an information file related to the communication specifications of PROFINET I/O-compatible
device and a separate, individual file exists for each device. The GSDML file is necessary for using the
PROFINET I/O configuration software to connect the HFC system & PLC.
The GSDML file is included in the installation CD and/or downloadble from the FEC website. Please refer to the
PLC instruction manual for the PROFINET I/O configuration software concerning the appropriate method for
using the GSDML file.
● Module Pin Configuration
No. Signal Description 1 8
1 TD+ Send data +
2 TD- Send data -
3 RD+ Receive data +
4 - Not used.
5 - Not used.
6 RD- Receive data -
7 - Not used.
8 - Not used.

* The cable is not provided with the equipment. Please provide a LAN cable of Category 5e or higher.

・ Be sure to connect the cable with all power OFF.


Caution

PAGE 9-45
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

● List of LED Indications


The module LEDs indicate the node status of the HFC3000 PROFINET I/O System and the network state.

B : Module
A : Network Status LED
Status LED
C : Link
Activity LED
LED Color State Details
Off Off Offline Offline or power is not supplied.
Lit on Online Communicating normally.
Network Green Communication
A Status Flash Although online, connection is unestablished.
unestablished
LED A critical error has occurred. / Redundant IP
Lit on Error
Red address.
Flash Connection timeout A connection timeout has occurred once or more.
Off Off Power OFF Power is not supplied.
Lit on Online Normal state
Module
Green Communication Due to incomplete configuration or connection
B Status Flash
unestablished failure, the device must be re-recognized.
LED
Lit on Error A critical error has occurred.
Red
Flash Error A recoverable error has occurred.
ETHERNET link is unestablished and
Off Off Link unestablished
Link communication is not performed.
C ETHERNET link is established but communication
Activity Lit on Not communicating
is not performed.
LED Green
ETHERNET link is established and communication
Flash Communicating
is in progress.

I9-6-3 I/O Signal Specifications

I/O Input/Output Message Input/Output


Controller to PLC PLC to Controller Controller to PLC PLC to Controller
Maximum
32 bytes (256 points) 8 bytes (64 points) 4096 bytes 32 bytes
Setting
Standard
16 bytes (128 points) 8bytes (64 points) 200 bytes 32 bytes
Setting

PAGE 9-46
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

9-6-4 Fieldbus Setup

Using the HFC3000 Software, setting of the Anybus-CompactCom PROFINET I/O is performed using the
PROFINET I/O Window tab.
The network settings, the station name, the I/O settings, and the message settings can be changed.

●Default (Default settings)


・Network Settings
IP Address: 192.168.10.50
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway: 192.168.10.1
・Station Name: HFC3000PRT01
・Setting I/O [PLC to Controller]: 8bytes[64bits]
・Setting I/O [Controller to PLC]: 16bytes[128bits]
・Message Bytes Settings [PLC to Controller]: 32bytes
・Message Bytes Settings [Controller to PLC]: 200bytes
* Message Block is fixed at 250 bytes.
●Network Settings
・IP Address: 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255
・Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255
・Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255
●Station Name
Setting range: ASCII characters (half-width alphanumeric characters・ 16 characters at max.)
Please make sure that the name is the same as the name registered at the PLC side.
If the names are not the same, network connection with the PLC side cannot be established.

PAGE 9-47
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

●Setting I/O
・[PLC to Controller]
Setting range: 2bytes[16bits] ~ 8bytes[64bits]
・[Controller to PLC]
Setting range: 2bytes[16bits] ~ 32bytes[256bits]
●Message Bytes Settings
・[PLC to Controller]
Setting range: 0byte ~ 32bytes
・[Controller to PLC]
Setting range: 0byte ~ 4096bytes

PAGE 9-48
Chapter 9 Fieldbus I/O Interfaces

(Blank Page)

PAGE 9-49

You might also like